Quarterlytics / Consumer Cyclical / Department Stores / Marks and Spencer Group PLC

Marks and Spencer Group PLC

maksf · OTC Consumer Cyclical
Claim this profile
Ticker maksf
Exchange OTC
Sector Consumer Cyclical
Industry Department Stores
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2008 Annual Report · Marks and Spencer Group PLC
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual report and 
financial statements 2008

Quality (cid:129) Value (cid:129) Service (cid:129) Innovation (cid:129) Trust

What’s inside
About us

1 Our plan

Key performance indicators

2 Key performance indicators

Business review

4 Chairman’s foreword
5 Chief Executive’s statement
9 Group Finance and 

Operations Director’s statement

10 Our core UK business
11 Womenswear and lingerie
11 Marketplace trends
14 Menswear
15 Kidswear
16 Home
17 Food
20 People
22 Service, IT and logistics
24 Property and store environment
26 M&S Direct
28 International
30 Plan A

Your Board

32 Your Board

Financial review

33 Financial review

Governance

35 Group Directors’ report
39 Corporate governance statement
48 Remuneration report

Financial statements

56 Auditors’ report
57 Consolidated income statement
57 Consolidated statement of 

recognised income and expense

58 Consolidated balance sheet 
59 Consolidated cash flow information
60 Notes to the financial statements
92 Company income statement
92 Company balance sheet
93 Company statement of changes 

in shareholders’ equity

93 Company cash flow statement
94 Company notes to 

the financial statements

96 Group financial record

Shareholder information

99 Shareholder information 

Index

What’s online…

This year, the majority of M&S 
shareholders will be clicking through to
marksandspencer.com/annualreport08
to read our Annual report online. The 
experience will not only be a more engaging
one, but a greener one, which helped us
save about four million pages of paper.

It’s a major step forward for us, as we move
towards online becoming our main form of shareholder communication
(see page 4 for details). 

Our annual report website now offers:

(cid:129) An interactive experience 

We’ve created different features for you to explore, such as 
an interactive timeline of the year and map. 

(cid:129) Clear and simple navigation

Making it quick and easy to find the information you need.

(cid:129) View as you please 

There’s no need to read or print the whole report if you don’t 
want to – you can simply print selected pages as you view 
them, or download a PDF of the sections you’re interested in. 
The majority of the report can also be viewed on handhelds.

(cid:129) A user-friendly experience 

The website has been designed to be accessible for people 
with disabilities. Key features include the ability to resize text 
to a larger font, tagged images, charts and graphs, and 
optimisation for  screen readers.
marksandspencer.com/annualreport08 

About M&S

We are one of the UK’s
leading retailers, with over
21 million people visiting
our stores each week. 
We offer stylish, high quality,
great value clothing and
home products, as well as
outstanding quality foods,
responsibly sourced from
around 2,000 suppliers
globally. We employ over
75,000 people in the UK 
and abroad, and have 
622 UK stores, as well as 
an expanding international
business.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

1

Our plan

A
b
o
u
t
u
s

In the last year, we’ve built on our plan 
to grow M&S into a world-class retailer
that’s customer-focused, fast-moving 
and flexible. We work hard to ensure 
we offer only the highest quality products,
service and shopping environments 
in all of our stores. 

Looking forward, our plan hasn’t changed,
but it has broadened to focus on five key
growth areas. We will: 

(cid:129) continue to invest in and grow our core
UK retail business, by introducing new
goods and services;

(cid:129) strengthen our UK property portfolio;
(cid:129) drive our M&S Direct business;
(cid:129) expand our International business; and
(cid:129) integrate Plan A (our ‘eco plan’) into

every aspect of how we do business, 
so that we grow in a sustainable way.

We will monitor and measure our
performance against these objectives. 
In the following pages, we’ve begun this
process by setting out Key Performance
Indicators (KPIs). 

In the current difficult economic climate,
our brand values – quality, value,
service, innovation and trust – are more
important than ever. Our commitment 
to these values sets us apart from our
competitors, and enables us to offer 
our customers something truly special. 

2007/08 has been a year of positive
achievements, as you’ll see in the Chief
Executive’s statement. Although the
outlook for the global and domestic
economy remains uncertain, we’re
confident that we’re making good
progress towards long-term growth.

Food
UK sales (excluding VAT) 
£4,250m (+6.9%)

Food accounts for 51.1% of our UK
business and we have a market share 
of 4.3% (source: TNS Worldpanel). 
We opened 98 Simply Food stores
growing our portfolio to 299 across the
UK, including franchised stores in BP
Connect forecourts, motorway service
stations, railway stations and airports.

>read more on page 5

Total group sales
£9,022m

Clothing and Home
UK sales (excluding VAT) 
£4,059m (+1.4%)

We are the UK’s largest clothing retailer
with a value market share of 11.0% and
volume market share of 11.2% (source:
TNS Worldpanel) and sales accounting
for 48.9% of our UK business. 

>read more on page 5

International
Sales (excluding VAT) 
£713m (+16.8%)

Our International business accounts for
7.9% of Group turnover and has grown
to 278 stores in 39 territories globally.
During the year, we entered 4 new
territories and opened 38 new stores. 

>read more on page 5

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
2

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Key performance indicators

Group revenue  £m

Group operating profit  £m

£m

■ UK Retail
■ International Retail

Total

2007/08

2006/07

2005/06

2004/05

2004/05
7,034.7
455.8
7,490.5

2005/06
7,275.0
522.7
7,797.7

2006/07
7,977.5
610.6
8,588.1

2007/08
8,309.1
712.9
9,022.0

9,022.0

8,588.1

7,797.7

7,490.5

£m

■ UK Retail
■ International Retail

Total

2007/08

2006/07

2005/06

2004/05

2004/05
588.4
60.7
649.1

2005/06
790.1
65.7
855.8

2006/07
956.5
87.5
1,044.0

2007/08
972.9
116.4
1,089.3

1,089.3

1,044.0

855.8

649.1

Group profit before tax  £m

Earnings per share 

2007/08

2006/07

2005/06

2004/05

1,007.1

965.2

751.4

556.1

2007/08

43.6p

2006/07  40.4p
2005/06  31.4p
2004/05  19.2p

Group gross margin 

Market share value  Clothing & footwear  

2007/08

38.6%

2006/07  38.9%
2005/06  38.3%
2004/05  34.7%

2007/08

11.0%

2006/07  11.1%
2005/06  10.4%

2005/06
Womenswear 10.5
24.3
Lingerie
9.6
Menswear
4.2
Kidswear

2006/07
11.3
26.1
10.3
4.5

2007/08
11.1
24.8
10.5
4.8

Market share value  Food

Market share volume  Clothing & footwear

2007/08

4.3%

2006/07  4.2%*
2005/06  4.1%

Note: As part of TNS’ annual
restatements, data can sometimes
alter in prior years as they make
changes to definitions or clean up 
the data following more detailed
information. This has always been the
case and any changes are typically
very small adjustments. This is a
process that all data providers do 
as a part of due diligence.

* Rebased figure

2007/08

11.2%

2006/07  10.7%
2005/06  10.1%

Womenswear
Lingerie
Menswear
Kidswear

2005/06
8.8
16.7
11.2
4.4

2006/07
10.0
18.3
11.1
5.0

2007/08
10.0
17.9
13.1
5.2

The profit measures above are from continuing operations and stated before property disposals and exceptional items.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

3

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Average weekly footfall

2004/05

2005/06

2006/07

2007/08

19.3m*

19.8m*

21.0m*

21.4m

Approximately half of M&S UK stores are fitted with entrance cameras that record the number
of people who visit our stores. This known footfall is analysed so that we can establish the ratios
between the visits and sales, and then apply this to stores without cameras. A total average
footfall figure can then be calculated. 

In 2007/08 there was a change in methodology and an upgrade in technology that means we
are more accurately capturing customer footfall. Previously we were under-stating our customer
flow. We switched to enhanced technology – thermal image cameras that are more sensitive 
in picking up flow of individuals and separating groups of people as they walk into the store. 
We also increased the sample of annualised stores from 33 to 260, weighted to represent the
whole chain.
* Rebased figure

Mystery shopping

Each of our stores is anonymously visited once a month – twice 
in the case of our larger flagship stores – by a mystery shopper 
who evaluates service quality. In 2007/08 that was the equivalent 
of approximately 6,240 visits to our stores. Scores for each question 
are validated through an online customer survey.

May

June

July

Aug Sept

Oct

Nov

Dec

Jan

Feb Mar

85

84

84

85

85

86

87

88

87

88

87

%

2007/08

84

82

82

83

82

81

79

78

2006/07

73

73

70

Operational CO2e emissions  tonnes 

2006/07

2007/08

2011/12

-9%

We’ve reduced our carbon dioxide and equivalent emissions
(CO2e) produced by our UK and Republic of Ireland stores,
offices, warehouses, business travel and logistics. Emissions
are down by 9% from 517,000 tonnes in 2006/07 to 469,000
tonnes, despite a 5% increase in sales-floor area.

517

469

Nil

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

Energy efficiency  kWh/sq ft

Waste sent to landfill  tonnes

2006/07

2007/08

2011/12

2006/07

2007/08

2011/12

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

-4%

54,000

51,000

-6%

68

65

51

For Plan A performance refer to the How we do business report at marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

0

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
4

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Chairman’s foreword

Your dividend

22.5p

8.3p

14.2p

Total dividend

Interim dividend

Final dividend

Lord Burns

This is my final report to you as Chairman, and I’m pleased to report that while the
market has become tougher in the second half, it has been a good year for M&S.
Profits are up; our plan remains firmly on track; and we end 2007/08 as a stronger,
more competitive business than for many years. As a result, we report an increase 
in your dividend of 23% to 22.5p and an increase in adjusted earnings per share (EPS)
of 7.9% to 43.6p.

The work done over the last four years in getting the basics
right has enabled us to deliver good results despite difficult
conditions. However, the trading environment remains
uncertain and we need the right management in place to 
take us forward. 

For these reasons, the Board concluded that it would be in 
the best interests of the business to retain Sir Stuart Rose 
in a leadership role until 2011. We also wanted to prepare for 
a smooth transition to a new Chief Executive before Stuart’s
eventual departure, and more generally, to ensure continuity 
in a business that has experienced a great deal of change in
recent years. 

We decided that these objectives could best be achieved 
by Stuart taking up the position of Executive Chairman. He
explains on page 6 how this will enable him to continue to 
drive the business forward, while giving others greater scope 
to demonstrate their talents and leadership ability. 

Although the decision to retain Stuart until 2011 has 
received widespread support, there has been some criticism 
of combining the roles of Chairman and Chief Executive. We
remain strongly of the view that this was the only practical way
to secure his extended term, and is the right decision for M&S.
As I explained in detail in the letter sent to all shareholders on 
3 April 2008, we have put in place a number of safeguards to
mitigate the governance concerns arising from Stuart’s new
role. These include the appointment of Sir David Michels as

independent Deputy Chairman and the search for a new
independent non-executive director is underway. We have
introduced annual voting for Stuart’s reappointment starting
this year, and are also considering recruiting a further new
independent non-executive director. To see a copy of this 
letter go to marksandspencer.com/thecompany

You may notice certain changes to this year’s report, resulting
from the new Companies Act 2006. Shareholders were given 
a choice of formats in which to receive our report, and we were
pleased that so many have opted to read it online, enabling 
us to reduce our environmental impact. With greater emphasis
on online reporting, we’ve created a much improved website,
which you can see at
marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

I have enjoyed my time with M&S. Significant progress has
been made as the business has continued to be transformed
in the eyes of customers, employees and the wider world. 
I am confident that our strong Board, and plan for long-term
growth, puts M&S on course for a successful future.

Lord Burns
Chairman

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

5

Chief Executive’s 
statement

It’s been another good year for M&S, achieved in
difficult circumstances. We started with a strong
first half, but experienced more difficult trading
conditions in the second half, largely as a result 
of the economic slowdown. 

Having completed the first phase of our recovery,
we are now broadening our plan in order to take
the business into the next stage of growth. In
2008/09 we will need to manage the business 
in a challenging economic environment, while
continuing to invest for future growth.

Broadening the plan
In 2004 we put in place a three-part plan for renewing and reinvigorating M&S
in order to secure profitable growth and build the business for the long term.
Our focus was on getting the basics right, by improving the products we offer,
our customer service and shopping environments. 

In 2007/08 we continued to make progress against the plan. We sold more
goods to more people, reporting our biggest volume increase in sales in eight
years, with volume market share in clothing and footwear at 11.2%. At the
same time, we held our lead in the value market for clothing and footwear
achieving 11.0% market share. Clothing and home sales were up 1.4% to
almost £4.06bn. Per una also performed strongly under the leadership of
George Davies, reporting sales of more than £428m. 

Sir Stuart Rose

Highlights

£1,007m

Adjusted pre-tax profits

4.3%

Increase in adjusted pre-tax profits

£9,022m

Group sales

5.1%

Increase in Group sales

UK stores

International stores

Flagship stores

44

Simply Food stores

167

High street stores

219

Retail park stores

M&S outlets

27

33

Simply Food 
franchised stores

Total UK stores

132

622

622

UK stores

278

International
stores

Bahrain

Bermuda

Bulgaria

Croatia

Cyprus

Czech Republic

Gibraltar

Greece

Guernsey

Hong Kong

Hungary

India

Indonesia

Jersey

Kuwait

Latvia

Lithuania

Malaysia

Malta

Oman

1

1

1

4

10

10

1

35

4

8

9

14

13

6

1

1

1

4

3

1

Philippines

Poland

Qatar

Republic of Ireland

Romania

Russia

Saudi Arabia

Serbia

Singapore

Slovakia

Slovenia

South Korea

Spain

Switzerland

Taiwan

Thailand

Turkey

UAE

Ukraine

14

4

1

17 

6

12

8 

1

7

1

1

17 

5

1

3

10

34

5

3

Total International 
stores

278

1 store opened in Libya in April 2008

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
6

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

In food, a good performance saw sales increase from £3.97bn to
almost £4.25bn, and value market share remain steady at 4.3%. 

M&S Money continues to benefit from our partnership with
HSBC, with 3.8 million customers now signed-up to an M&S
Money financial product. M&S Money now has more than 
3.1 million M&S Money credit cards in circulation, 114 bureaux
de change in our stores, and it served 4.8 million travel money
customers during the year. Its range of financial products also
includes car, home, travel, pet and wedding insurance, as well
as cash ISA and unit trusts like the M&S Ethical Fund.

As we take the business forward, we are broadening the plan for
long-term growth. This will be achieved by continuing to invest in
our core UK retail business introducing new goods and services;
strengthening our UK property portfolio; driving our M&S Direct
business; expanding our international business; and ensuring
Plan A – our ‘eco plan’ – is integrated in everything we do. 

I will return to the specific steps we’re taking to achieve 
our objectives on page 7. First I want to review the changes
we’ve made to ensure we are building on a strong foundation.

Building management capability
On page 4, Lord Burns explains the business rationale for 
my appointment to Executive Chairman. As the decision has
attracted much comment, I’d like to highlight the immediate
and longer-term benefits for the business. 

We believe in developing management talent internally, 
but this has been difficult for M&S in recent years, with the
business experiencing considerable turbulence, followed by
rapid change since the turn of the millennium. However, we now
have a strong senior team in place, which has an opportunity 
to develop its skills – with Ian Dyson as Group Finance and
Operations Director, Steven Esom and Kate Bostock appointed
as Executive Directors running food and clothing respectively
and Steven Sharp continuing in his role as Executive Director 
of Marketing. We also benefit from an expanded and talented
Executive Committee (pictured on page 8).

With Ian taking on significant new responsibilities, I can now
focus on a more specific set of executive responsibilities, 

in particular product, people development, and key growth
areas for the business including M&S Direct and International.
My new role will also give me time to develop and mature talent
within the business – a key task for any Chairman. At the same
time the Board will be able to continue to drive a proven plan
without distraction, in a difficult economic environment.

Responding to market conditions
2007/08 was a year of two halves, with a strong start followed
by a weaker performance. While we believe our second half
performance is largely attributable to a deterioration in market
conditions, like any retailer there are things we could have done
better. For instance, although we sold significantly more volume,
we under-potentialised products in the middle and top price
categories – what we call ‘better’ and ‘best’ – during the key
Christmas period.

Although we can’t predict how severe the current downturn 
will be, or how long it will last, we expect its impact to be felt 
into 2009/10. However, we believe we have the potential to
outperform the competition by planning for modest sales 
growth and keeping a tight control on costs and stock levels,
while at the same time, driving our business using our five 
key values of: quality, value, service, innovation and trust.

Our efforts in the last three years to re-engage with customers
so they once again consider M&S as ‘great value’ for money, 
will support us in the years ahead. 

We have reviewed our pricing architecture in order to attract 
a broad range of customers. We are now achieving a wider 
price span – staying in touch with the supermarkets at entry
levels, while extending our offers above and beyond other 
high street retailers. It will enable us to flex our ‘good’, ‘better’
and ‘best’ ranges to respond to changing customer demand, 
as and when the economic situation alters.

We continue to invest in our stores, having completed 70% 
of our store modernisation programme. We plan to modernise
an additional 10% of space, and open an additional 5.5% of
new space in 2008/09 so that we enter a difficult period for 
UK retailing, with the majority of our stores looking their best 
and using every square foot to its full potential. 

April 2007
‘Wash at 30’
campaign 

M&S announces
campaign to wash at
30˚C, and to re-label
almost 75% of its
clothing ranges to
include the words
‘Think Climate – 
Wash at 30˚C’.

June 2007
Recycled
schoolwear
launches 

M&S becomes the 
first retailer to launch
schoolwear made from
recycled plastic bottles.

September 2007
Saturated fat 
levels cut

M&S cuts as much as
82% of saturated fat
levels from over 500
products including
sandwiches, ready
meals, crisps and
savoury snacks.

September 2007
Big & Tall launches 

Offering more than 450
items online, ranging from
tailoring to knitwear to
casual shirts and trousers,
at the same price as
standard sized clothes. 

November 2007
A Hollywood
Christmas

The Christmas advertising
campaign launches featuring
leading man Antonio Banderas
alongside the M&S leading
ladies.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

7

Finally, owning 70% of our assets and having relatively low
gearing means M&S has one of the strongest balance sheets 
in the retail sector. Ian will discuss this further on page 9.

1. Investing in our core UK business

Product
Our core UK business comprises the individual business units 
of womenswear, lingerie, menswear, kidswear, home and food.
In 2007/08 we made good progress in each business unit. 

In womenswear and lingerie, the emphasis was on our
segmentation plan, where we clarified our sub-brands (such as
Autograph) to help our customers quickly and easily find what
they’re looking for. Further work is needed this year to ensure
customers feel comfortable in shopping for their requirements.
At the same time, ranges were continually refreshed so that
customers can always find something new. This adds up to
what we call ‘Every Woman, Every Time’ – where we make it
easier for our customers, regardless of their age, size and
budget – to find clothes that are beautifully made, stylish and
offer great value for money. 

Work to segment our sub-brands was also central to the
kidswear plan, as we took important steps to win back 
market share. 

In menswear and home, changing customers’ perception of
value was the focus as we competed hard on opening price
points (with home prices at almost 12% below the high street
average), while improving ‘better’ and ‘best’ products for the
more aspirational shopper. 

In food, we delivered against our commitment to provide food 
of the highest quality without compromise, with a focus on
provenance, innovation and health. 

Brand stretch
Our brand is strong, and in 2008/09 we believe we can build 
on the trust it inspires to offer our customers better service and
more of what they want through ‘brand stretch’. For instance, by
featuring plus sizes online; offering bespoke Made to Measure
shirts for men; and expanding our in-store hospitality options.

Additionally, while M&S will always be essentially an ‘own 
brand’ business, we believe we can add significant extra 
value, by partnering with guest brands that complement our
values. In the last year, this was predominantly with trusted
technology brands in home, such as Sony and Apple. In food,
where we face strong competition, customers tell us that time
and convenience are key drivers. During the summer we will
therefore trial the sale of up to 350 branded food products –
such as Marmite, Heinz tomato ketchup and other branded
‘must haves’ – in a small number of stores. We will roll this 
out if successful.

Service and store environments
In addition to our products, we have continued to improve 
the quality of our service and store environments.

In service, during 2007/08 our store colleagues sold record
volumes, while simultaneously improving their scores in our
mystery shopping programme – achieving an above average
score of 86%. It’s to their credit that we continue to be seen 
as one of the high street’s best customer service providers. 

We’ve invested behind the scenes in our IT and logistics
infrastructure in order to maintain service efficiency. In 2007/08,
as well as delivering 13% more stock to our stores than in
2006/07, our logistics network responded to a 63% rise in
volume from M&S Direct. The plan has helped us to develop
faster and more efficient IT systems throughout our business.
For instance, we are introducing new point-of-sale systems,
including more than 2,000 new tills and 258 new hand-held
terminals in-store to make stockchecking easier and more
efficient. Ian will discuss this further on page 9.

While our IT and logistics improvements help support our stores
to run more efficiently, our store modernisation programme is
improving our shopping environments (see page 24).

2. Strengthening the UK property portfolio
We are undertaking one of the biggest store investment
programmes in the UK; modernising and expanding our existing
footage (with 70% now complete); increasing the number of
stores we have; and ensuring we offer the right stores in the
right locations. We will modernise a further 10% this year.

January 2008
Oxfam Clothes
Exchange

Exchange launches to
reduce the 1 million tonnes
of clothing sent to landfill
each year in the UK, and
raise funds for Oxfam’s work
to tackle poverty and injustice.

February 2008
Carrier bag charging

A 5p charge for food 
carrier bags announced, 
to be introduced in M&S
stores from the beginning 
of May. All profits to go 
to environmental charity
Groundwork.

April 2008 
Artificial colours and
flavourings removed

M&S becomes the first retailer 
to remove all artificial colours and
flavourings from its entire food 
and soft drinks range.

May 2008
Eco factory launch 

M&S suppliers launch two 
eco factories in Sri Lanka. 
They will produce per una and
Autograph lingerie exclusively
for M&S.

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
8

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

In order to achieve the scale of our property plan, in November
2007 we announced that we would open an additional 15% 
to 20% more space in the next three to four years. 

In 2007/08 we made significant strides against the plan,
opening 38 new stores, which helped lift sales by 16.8% 
to £712.9m; and operating profit by 33% to £116.4m. 

But, like any business in this market, we need to prioritise costs.
Although we will continue to invest in our store modernisation
and expansion programme, this year we will particularly focus on
new footage, and modernisations with extensions. See page 9.

3. Developing our M&S Direct business 
M&S Direct covers our e-commerce website; home catalogue;
Christmas hamper delivery; flower and wine delivery; in-store
ordering service; and Lunch to Go. During the year it not only
became an important part of our commitment to become a
multi-channel retailer, but with sales up £60m to £220m, it 
put us on course to reach our target of £500m annual sales 
by 2010/11.

On our e-commerce site in particular (relaunched with Amazon
in March 2007), we have recorded strong growth with visits 
to the website up by nearly 60%, and sales growing ahead 
of the market. 

4. Building an International business 
Expanding internationally provides strong opportunities to build 
a broader revenue base and drive profitable growth in some of
the world’s most exciting markets. In November 2007 we set
ourselves a target for International to achieve between 15% 
to 20% of total Group revenues within the next five years 
(in 2007/08 it contributed 7.9%). We will do this by flexing our
business model so that we expand not just through franchise
partners, but also on a part-owned and wholly-owned basis. 

We have already signed deals in Europe with two of our existing
partners, and in India where we will open around 30 to 50 new
stores in the next five years. This is in addition to our plans to
enter China on a wholly-owned basis later this year.

5. Keeping up momentum on Plan A
Plan A, our five-year ‘eco plan’, reached the end of its first 
year in January 2008. We pledged to meet 100 separate 
Plan A commitments within five years, and so far we’ve 
made progress on 94.

Despite the tough consumer climate, our commitment to 
Plan A remains, because there are compelling moral as 
well as commercial reasons to do so. Plan A gives us brand
differentiation, and as Al Gore said, “a sustainable business 
can be a profitable one”. 

Looking ahead
The next year will be tough. We will have to continue to
challenge ourselves to become more efficient, drive down
costs and improve our rate of return. At the same time we
must maintain our investment for the long term both in the 
UK and overseas. I believe that we have started to achieve
this. We have talented and motivated people; well-priced,
quality products; a clear plan; and dedication to understanding
what our customers want – all of which put us in a good
position to meet the difficult market conditions that lie ahead. 

I would like to pay tribute to all of our staff and suppliers for 
their hard work this year. It has been a tough but rewarding
experience, and they can take pride in their achievement. 
I would also like to thank Lord Burns for his support as
Chairman over the past two years. He has guided the Board
through some difficult discussions, always having the best
interests of the Company at heart.

Sir Stuart Rose
Chief Executive

1

3

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

1 Clem Constantine

Director of Property 
and Store 
Development

2 Steve Rowe

Director of Retail

3 Nayna McIntosh
Director of Store 
Marketing and Design 

4 Carl Leaver
Director of 
International Business 

6 Ian Dyson

Group Finance and 
Operations Director

5 Kate Bostock

Executive Director 
of Clothing

7 Sir Stuart Rose
Chief Executive

8 Steven Sharp

Executive Director 
of Marketing

9 Steven Esom

Executive Director 
of Food

10 Tanith Dodge

Director of Human 
Resources

11 Andrew Skinner

Director of
GM Merchandising 
and Planning 

12 Darrell Stein
Director of 
IT and Logistics

13 John Dixon

Director of Home 
and M&S Direct 

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

9

Group Finance and 
Operations Director’s
statement

Highlights

7.9%

Increase in earnings 
per share

£1.1bn

£914m

Capital expenditure

Returned to shareholders

Ian Dyson

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

2007/08 was a year in which we made good progress in moving the business 
forward. Earnings per share were up 7.9%. At the same time as continuing to 
grow our earnings, we invested £1.1bn in our business to drive future growth, and 
also returned £914m to our shareholders via dividends and the share buy back.

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

Results
Sales were up 5.1% to over £9.0bn with a robust performance
in the UK boosted by almost 5% of new space, and another
strong year for International, where sales were up 16.8%.
Gross margin in the UK was down slightly to 43%, but good
control of our costs enabled us to deliver profit growth of 4.3%
overall, to £1.0bn.

Our interest charge was up only 4.3%, despite a significant
increase in net debt to £3.1bn, reflecting a much higher
pension credit. With a low tax rate of 27% and a lower number
of shares in issue, earnings per share were up 7.9% to 43.6p.

Investing in the business
Last year we invested £1,055m to support the future growth 
of the business. This investment was focused in three areas: 
UK property portfolio, International and supply chain and
information technology (IT).

We modernised a further 35% of our store portfolio to take 
us to 70%. This included some major developments and
extensions at stores such as Edinburgh, London Colney,
Cheshunt, Lisburn and Braehead. We expect to modernise a
further 10% of our estate in 2008/09. We also added space in
line with our strategy to develop and expand the M&S footprint
in the UK. In total we added 4.8% of new space, with 3% 
in general merchandise (GM) and 8.7% in food, reflecting 
the continued roll out of our successful Simply Food format. 
In 2008/09 we expect to add a further 5.5% of new space.

In International we continued to build our business in Ireland,
and worked with our franchise partners to move the business
forward. The biggest developments however, were the
acquisition of controlling interests in our franchise businesses
in Greece and the Balkans, and in the Czech Republic. We see
substantial growth opportunities for these businesses over the
coming year. 

Shanghai in the autumn, and in India we have signed a deal with
Reliance to develop M&S throughout this fast developing nation. 

Underpinning our growth prospects is a plan to invest to
upgrade our supply chain and our IT systems. This is a major
programme that will enable us to grow our business effectively
and efficiently. We will add logistics capacity in food and
restructure our GM logistics, centred on the opening of fewer,
larger distribution centres, beginning with Bradford in 2010/11.
In IT we will implement new store systems, including POS, 
new trading systems and new support systems.

While we are sensitive to the economic environment, we are
continuing to invest to move our business forward and intend
to spend between £800m and £900m in capital expenditure 
in 2008/09.

A strong balance sheet
Our strong balance sheet underpins our future plans to invest
in the business and gives us resilience against difficult market
conditions. Our ratios remain strong and we retain ownership
of 70% of our property portfolio.

The strength of our balance sheet enabled us to return more
than £900m to our shareholders during 2007/08. Dividends
increased by 23% and we bought back 7.4% of our share
capital at a cost of £556m.

As Stuart has said, 2008/09 will be tough. We will manage 
our business accordingly but will also not lose sight of the
longer term opportunity by continuing to invest in our business.
This approach will, we believe, drive value for our shareholders 
over time.

We have also moved on in establishing M&S in the exciting
markets of China and India. We will open our first store in

Ian Dyson
Group Finance and Operations Director

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
10 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Our core UK business

In the following pages we review our core UK business, 
which covers the individual business units of womenswear,
menswear, kidswear, home and food, as well as our service
(including IT and logistics) and store environments. 

Building our brand

The challenge for M&S
marketing is how we stay
ahead of the competition,
by responding to the
things that matter the
most to our customers. 

One way we’ve responded to this challenge is by evolving our
well-loved and successful food and womenswear advertising
campaigns.

In food, we’ve retained the same broad approach, but we’ve
started to respond to the issues we know our customers care
about. Everyone knows that our food tastes good, so our new
‘manifesto’ campaign now goes a step further by introducing
powerful messages on provenance and healthy eating. For
example, our ‘mellow yellow’ ad showcased our commitment to
using only free range eggs in all of our food, and ‘true colours’
told the story of how all our food is now 100% free of artificial
colours and flavourings.

Our womenswear ads – which feature the famous faces of
Twiggy, Erin O’Connor, Lizzie Jagger, Noémie Lenoir, Laura
Bailey and Myleene Klass (and at Christmas, special guest
Antonio Banderas) – change with the seasons, featuring new
soundtracks and locations. As with the food ads, we survey
shoppers each month, and we’re encouraged by the customer
feedback we’ve received. Figures from Adwatch (who analyse
the impact of company advertising), show more than half of 
our food ads rated within the top five, and our womenswear 
ads continue to lead at number one. 

Our marketing evolved during the year, with changes made 
to refresh in-store décor so that it’s consistent with the look 
and feel of our new and modernised stores. We communicated 
our Plan A achievements to customers both in-store and
through the relaunched Plan A section of our website at
marksandspencer.com/planA. In both cases we provided
details on how our customers can get involved in specific
initiatives such as ‘Wash at 30’, the Oxfam Clothes Exchange
and reusing carrier bags. 

The effectiveness of our advertising and marketing campaigns 
is evidenced by our ability to hold brand momentum (our brand
impact and performance) despite a slowdown on the high street.

In the year to come, our challenge is to maintain this momentum
– with Plan A playing an important role here – and by ensuring
we retain brand consistency as we expand internationally.

Steven Sharp: Executive Director of Marketing 
Steven joined M&S in 2004. In addition to his marketing role, he is 
also responsible for store design and presentation as well as running 
the relationship with         M&S Money.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 11

Womenswear 
and lingerie

In 2007/08 we strengthened our position 
as the number one brand for womenswear
and lingerie, despite a tough second half,
by doing what we do best. From classic
and tailored looks, to fast fashion inspired
from the catwalk, we demonstrated that 
‘Every Woman, Every Time’ is at the heart 
of our womenswear and lingerie plan. In
short, it’s our commitment to help every
woman – regardless of her age, size and
budget – to find stylish clothes that are
beautifully made, at great value prices.

Our performance
During the year, value market share in
womenswear fell from 11.3% to 11.1% in 
the face of tough competition on the high
street, strong downward pressure on prices,
and a slowdown in customer spending.
However, volume market share remained
steady at 10.0%. We achieved this by looking
closely at our price structure to ensure our
competitiveness at opening price points. 

Marketplace trends 

A few of our favourite things...

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Cashmere

Selling at £49 in 2007/08 (down
from £69 in 2006/07), we sold
more than one cashmere item a
minute during our busiest week 
in London’s Marble Arch store.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

Lingerie 

We offer 78 bra sizes, from 28AA
through to 44J, and are the only 
high street retailer to offer machine
washable silk lingerie.

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

Leather 

From biker jackets to our famous
Little Black Dress, we introduced
affordable leather in line with the
latest catwalk trends.

In 2007/08, the retail market
continued to grow, but at a
slower rate than previous
years. Increasing levels of
debt and household bills have
had an impact on consumer
confidence, which is at its
lowest point since 1993 
(GfK research). The growing
demand on disposable income
has also seen customers
prioritise essential bills at 
the expense of shopping 
and leisure activities.

Generally, customers
continue to look for more
choice and convenience. 
As a result, the trend for
shopping online has
increased, partly due to
greater customer confidence
in payment security and
delivery. Retail parks and 
out-of-town shopping centres
have also grown in popularity,

offering greater breadth 
of choice in products and
shopping formats that fit
around customers’ differing
needs and busy lifestyles.

Looking specifically at the
clothing market, sales have
been the hardest hit by the
recent decline in customer
confidence – slowing through
the last quarter of 2007/08
and now in decline on the
year (TNS market research).
In a change to last year,
customers have started to
spend more on individual
items of clothing, investing 
in a few key pieces that 
offer versatility and can 
be dressed-up or down. 
As a result, value growth 
is marginally ahead of
volumes. The exception to
this is in womenswear where
customers continued to buy

‘more for less’ driven by a
desire for fast fashion and
multiple looks.

Despite a slowdown in the
housing market, there was
generally strong growth in
homeware sales as customers
updated their homes, rather
than move house. Specifically,
electronic goods continued
to sell well across the
industry, as price deflation 
of the latest ‘must-haves’
made them more accessible
to more people.

The food market held up
primarily through price
inflation and customers
buying more premium
products. Customers have
become savvy in shopping
across different outlets to
make the most of their food
budget – carefully choosing

‘what they buy where’ from
the basics, to treats.

The growing trend for fresh
ingredients has continued,
with customers looking for
key ingredients to cook from
scratch, or quality products
that allow them to assemble
a fresh meal. The increasing
profile of food sourcing and
animal welfare issues, has
also encouraged them to
trade-up to products that 
are free range and organic.

In the year ahead, the trading
environment will be tough.
Customers will feel ongoing
pressure on their personal
finances. In these challenging
conditions, they are expected
to turn to trusted, well-
established brands that
provide reassurance they are
spending their money wisely. 

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

 
 
 
 
 
particular emphasis on building on the
success of Autograph. 

We offer knitwear at prices from £9 to £49
and bras from £5 to £20, and will continue to
do so. However, we want our customers to
recognise our reputation for offering incredible
quality and excellent cuts across all of our
price points. 

No limits

We don’t aspire to be a 
brand where fast fashion 
is all that matters, but we 
do want to cater for women 
of all ages. Limited Collection
helps us do that – answering
our younger customers’
demands for affordable 
looks from the catwalk. 

It’s growing faster than any
other part of our womenswear
business, with market share
up amongst women under-35.
That’s because our customers
now know that if they like
something at M&S they
should buy it now.

12 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

In lingerie, the continual introduction of
innovative products in an extended range 
of sizes, as well as better segmentation of
our brands, helped us stay at number one
with 24.8% value market share and 17.9%
volume market share. 

An easier way to shop
In 2007/08, as part of our ‘Every Woman,
Every Time’ commitment, we reviewed the
segmentation of our sub-brands, so that we
can help our customers quickly and easily
find what they’re looking for. Although this 
will continue in 2008/09, improvements can
already be seen within Autograph (see below)
and lingerie (see page 13). 

Competing on value 
and quality 
During the last year, we responded to market
demand by becoming even more competitive
at our opening price points. While this
increased both our sales volume and market
share volume, we recognise the opportunity
to drive our ‘better’ and ‘best’ ranges – with

Brand strength in Autograph

Autograph stands for the best of modern and sophisticated M&S.
It grew strongly in 2007/08 by offering elegant and timely pieces,
in luxury fabrics and cuts, which are 
flexible for all lifestyles.

In recent months, we’ve seen some of our customers
become more interested in buying products of enduring 
style and quality, than in finding the lowest possible prices.
In response to this trend, we have improved our quality
throughout our price architecture, which means our value
credentials are stronger than ever. For example in Autograph,
our customers are willing to spend more on our luxury
fabrics such as silks and cashmere. By driving more 
product choice in these fabrics, we continue to grow 
our Autograph business.

Over the last year, we have expanded and strengthened 
the Autograph brand, introducing Autograph Exclusive,
which offers a range of limited edition pieces such as 
coats and eveningwear, and Autograph Weekend, a new
casual look with an American East Coast flavour. Both 
play an important role in our segmentation strategy and 
have added incremental sales to the brand.

Kate Bostock: Executive Director of Clothing
Kate joined M&S as Director of Womenswear in 2004, and was appointed
to the Board as Executive Director of Clothing in March 2008. 

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 13

Clearer choices in lingerie

Selling 50 million knickers a year (that’s nearly two pairs of knickers every second),
and 25 million bras – it’s estimated that one in three women wear M&S lingerie. 
To meet the underwear needs and tastes of every woman, we have in the past
introduced a wide range of different brands.

As part of our segmentation work, we reviewed our lingerie brands, matching 
them to our different customer profiles, before fine-tuning our offer – cutting out
duplication and filling in any gaps. We now offer five brands – Adored, Autograph,
Body Solutions, Limited Collection and per una. 

The move to fewer brands in lingerie has given women of all ages, sizes and
budgets, a clearer choice. It’s also helped us to focus on good basics at our
opening price points, as well as great value across the entire offer.

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

Faster, fresher fashions
The journey from catwalk to high street is
faster than ever, with customers expecting
something new and different each time they
come into store. Satisfying this increasing
demand poses a major challenge for any retailer.

In response, we’ve adopted a phased approach
to introducing new stock, which means that
25% of our womenswear will be new every
five to six weeks. Within that, we have brands
that release new products into stores on 
a three-week cycle. To make this quicker
turnaround possible, we are now buying
collections in two of our major brands (Limited
Collection and Autograph Weekend), from our
suppliers in Turkey, just eight weeks ahead. 

Looking ahead
In 2007/08 we introduced great value at our
opening price points in both womenswear
and lingerie and in doing so made good
progress in attracting customers in the 
under-35 age range. 

2008/09 will be a tough year. It will be more
important than ever to continually improve 
our ranges across all our price points, and to
ensure we’re responding to trends by quickly
getting new products into store. We’re now
working closely with our suppliers to achieve
even greater speed and flexibility, ensuring we
continue to keep pace with customer demand.

In store it is still important to ensure that the
distinctive offering of each of our sub-brands
makes the shopping experience an easy one
for our customers. In the year ahead, we will
push our brands even harder, for instance, 
by expanding Autograph gifts and introducing
Autograph essentials, and by further reducing
duplication and filling the gaps in our ranges.
Finally, we’ll also be finding new and
innovative ways to present womenswear
online (see page 26).

per una
It was another strong year for per una. The brand enjoyed its seventh
successive year of growth with sales of £429m in womenswear and lingerie.
Growth came from a number of key product areas, including cardigans,
dresses, jeans, macs and coats. Our capital expenditure programme 
positively impacted on per una sales, with the store modernisation and
expansion programme increasing per una footage by 15% for the year. 
Online sales grew by 153%, and International sales by 40% for the year. 

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

Per una’s point of difference in
today’s retail climate, is in giving
styles the per una ‘twist’. From the
lining, to the buttons, to the trims –
the per una twist is the detail that
makes its customers feel special.
This was seen in the reintroduction
of suiting, where the emphasis was
on special details and quality fabrics
that are part of per una’s distinct
style. Following the success of
suiting, per una will introduce
Speziale Tailoring later in 2008.

Another key moment in 2007/08 
was the launch of a 25-piece
capsule collection called GD25,
inspired by George Davies’ 25-year
career as a fashion innovator. 

Left: George Davis, 
Chairman of per una

Cottoning on to Fairtrade

We sell about 4.8 million Fairtrade cotton
garments annually (that’s about 92,000 a week). 

As the first major retailer to introduce a
Fairtrade cotton clothing range, which includes
the popular £5 Fairtrade t-shirt, we now work
with some 5,000 Fairtrade cotton farmers so
they not only get a fair price for their cotton, 
but a Fairtrade premium that they can use to
improve their working and living conditions. 

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
14 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Menswear

Menswear performed well in 2007/08,
despite the difficult second half. We grew
and protected volume market share from
11.1% last year to 13.1%, and value market
share from 10.3% to 10.5%, by competing
hard on price, quality and innovation.

Over the course of the year, we began 
to see a change of mood in the market. 
As we’ve seen in womenswear, some
customers became less concerned about
finding the lowest possible prices but 
more interested in the value represented
by clothes of enduring style and quality. 

A range of prices
Our strategy was to compete by having 
a wider price span – ensuring customers
always have a broad choice of price points. 

Tailoring is a good example. We now offer
suits in a wide range of styles, fabric and fit 
– from a great value ‘first suit’ at £49.50 to
handmade suits at £799 that rival varieties 
on Savile Row. 

Making quality count
As 2008/09 gets underway, we’ve observed
a shift in priorities from some customers.
Lasting quality of the kind that M&S is
famous for, is appealing more to our
customers as they begin to trade up, 
for example from a £15 linen/cotton shirt, 
to a £29.50 100% ultimate linen option.
We’ve been doing all we can to respond 
to this trend, by searching for the highest
quality materials, such as finer gauge 
merino wool and silks spun in Italy.

Our menswear brands
In menswear, as in womenswear, our 
sub-brands are important in helping customers
quickly find products that match their tastes
and needs. All of our three key menswear
brands – Autograph, Blue Harbour and
Collezione – made good progress over 
the last year (see below):

Autograph

Autograph has established its credentials 
as offering sharper styles and contemporary
design, which helped it to achieve significant
growth in 2007/08. Footwear, knitwear and
tailoring are particular strengths, from
designers such as the Jeffery-West team 
for shoes and Timothy Everest for suits. 
As Autograph continues to grow, we’ll 
have even more opportunity to bring in 
guest designers and faces, like we did 
with Take That, who featured in autumn’s
Autograph campaign.

Smart new ideas 

More than a quarter 
of our menswear sales 
come from products 
with ground-breaking
performance benefits. 
From ultimate non-iron
shirts, and the high street’s
first machine washable
formal wool trousers, to
water repellent StormwearTM
jeans (see above) – the 
M&S technical teams are
continuously looking for 
the latest developments 
in textiles.

New in 2007/08 were
‘climate control’ underwear,
featuring temperature-
regulating technology
developed by NASA, and
coin catcher pockets in 
all of our chinos.

Blue Harbour

Our Blue Harbour brand 
was reinvigorated in 2007/08.
We’ve taken it back to its
East Coast American roots,
and in doing so, have begun
to attract a younger 35 to 44
year-old customer.

Collezione

Inspired by Italian style, our luxury
Collezione brand continued to flourish
in 2007/08. We widened the choice of
‘better’ and ‘best’ options – introducing
new shoes at £75, as well as wool and
cashmere mix trousers at £49.50.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 15

Top of the class
for innovation

At M&S, quality and
innovation go hand-in-hand.
We believe it’s important to
offer our customers things
they simply can’t get from a
supermarket. For example:

All of our school blazers are
now made from recycled
polyester – consistent with
our Plan A credentials.

We’ve introduced iPod
blazers and coats, a must-
have for young music-lovers.

Parents can text us their
child’s details and we’ll send
personalised name-tags
ready to use.

Autograph 

Offering something a bit more
special, in more luxurious fabrics,
with key elements including party
dresses and suits, high quality
knitwear and daywear separates.

Kidswear

In 2007/08 we made positive progress
towards our long-term goal of winning
back market share in children’s clothing.

Achieving greater consistency across our
sub-brands, pricing structure and supply
base has helped us increase our volume
market share from 5.0% to end the year at
5.2% and our value market share from 4.5%
to 4.8%. This is underpinned by our growing
share of the newborn and toddler market,
and our continued position as the number
one provider of schoolwear for UK families.
Strong online sales, up 54% on last year,
have also made an important contribution.

In the year ahead, our challenge is to change
perceptions, so that M&S kidswear is the first
choice for style, as well as quality and price. 

Competing on price
As in womenswear and menswear, we
believe there is increasing demand for 
greater choice within our ‘better’ and ‘best’
categories, whilst maintaining a strong
opening price point stance. In response,
we’re segmenting our kidswear offer into
three key areas: everyday casualwear,
Autograph and Limited (see across).

Our determination to compete on price and
quality is clearly demonstrated by our plans
to offer an entire school outfit – polo shirt,
jumper and trousers or skirt – for just £6.50.
We’ll also be carrying this over to online,
where customers can buy complete outfits 
in just one click. 

Superheroes, super
opportunities
From Thomas the Tank Engine and Iron Man,
to High School Musical, our character-wear
performed strongly for us in 2007/08. In 
fact, we sell the widest range of character
clothing and merchandise on the high street
– featuring more than 40 different characters. 

In the year ahead, we’ll be focusing 
on our best sellers, to ensure they are
represented across the entire department 
– from babywear to socks to pyjamas. 
With the support of the marketing team, 
our kidswear section will be themed to
coincide with the launch of new movies 
or programmes, when popularity will be 
at its highest. 

Everyday
casualwear 

Featuring all the junior
wardrobe basics, 
such as jeans, t-shirts,
sweats, and weekend-
wear.

Limited

Our most fashionable
range, for all age groups
from newborn to 14,
featuring a bold use of
colour and a fast response
to the latest trends.

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
16 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Home

We achieved growth in every area of home
– our best performing business unit. In 
the face of growing pricing pressures, we
continued to raise our quality standards,
whilst significantly widening choice and
lowering prices.

Sales for the year were up by 7.9%. 
In addition, in August 2007, we launched 
our first standalone home store in Lisburn,
Northern Ireland, which performed ahead 
of expectations. We’ll be opening two more
in 2008/09. 

Down with prices,
up with quality
We’ve successfully met the challenge of 
price deflation, maintaining our home prices
at 12% below the high street average. Far
from compromising on quality, we regularly
upgrade our core ranges without increasing
our prices. For example, in 2007/08 we
upgraded our ‘good’ 100% cotton non-iron
range in bedding, to 100% Supima cotton
non-iron (our mid-priced sheet), while
keeping the price the same. 

At the upper end of the price spectrum, 
we have grown our Autograph branded
homeware range, offering the very best of
M&S quality in everything from bedding and
bathrooms to furniture and home accessories. 

Stretching the brand,
extending choice
During the year we successfully trialled 
an extended range of electrical goods in 
20 stores and online, selling market-leading
brands such as Sony and Apple. We’ll be
extending this range to 50 stores in 2008/09.
A range of white goods, including fridges,
cookers and washing machines, were
introduced in Lisburn and online in 2007/08
and we will continue to expand this offer to
new standalone home stores, as well as online.

Almost a quarter of M&S customers shop
from our home range, and we want to attract
more. To do this, we will continue to widen
choice within existing home areas, and move
into new categories such as gardening tools.
We will also be redeveloping our beauty
business, while continuing to grow our 
online service (see page 26 for more details).

Jargon-busting
with M&S

Customers who don’t know a
megabyte from a megapixel
can relax; we’ve rewritten the
technology manufacturers’
instructions. 

When technology
instructions start to get too
technical, we translate them
into everyday language, so
that they’re not only more
user-friendly, but help our
customers get the most 
out of their product. 

At home with Plan A

Sleep easy on our new bedding that combines
both organic and Fairtrade cotton. 

We’re the only major retailer to ensure every
light fitting we sell will accommodate energy-
saving light bulbs.

Branching out… we offset CO2 emissions 
from our deliveries by planting 10,000 trees
every year.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 17

Food

M&S has always been committed to being
the first choice for fresh, high quality and
convenient food that is ethically sourced.
In achieving this, the emphasis in 2007/08
was firmly on provenance, healthy eating
and innovation, as we reported continued
growth for the year. 

In the year ahead, as well as reinforcing
these values, we want to stretch the brand
further, so we offer our customers greater
choice and convenience. 

Performance
In 2007/08 we grew sales by 6.9% to 
about £4.25bn, reflecting the contribution
from new space, with the launch of 98
Simply Food stores (including 64 BP stores).
Strong performance in key product areas,
realignment of prices on key product lines,
whilst rigorously maintaining and improving
quality, also played an important role. 

Value market share for the year improved 
to 4.3%, despite increasing high street
competition. In the next few years, we 
want to increase our market share to 
just over 5% of the total UK food market. 

We plan to achieve this growth by opening
more Simply Food stores; expanding the
range of food we sell in all of our stores;
improving the value and quality of our lines;
maintaining our lead on innovation and
quality; and enhancing our store experience
and hospitality offers. We continue to
respond to food trends, such as cooking
from scratch; Fairtrade and organic; and
health awareness through the reduction 
of saturated fats, salt, sugar, additives 
and preservatives. 

A convenient offer
In the last year, we’ve responded to
customer feedback by taking steps towards
becoming a more convenient food shop. 
Our first step was to begin opening more
stores in out-of-town and retail park
locations. We’ve now also recently begun 
to broaden our product offer so that our
customers can buy more of what they 
want at M&S, whether cooking from scratch
(see page 18); buying something partly 
pre-prepared; or picking up a ready meal. 

As part of our commitment to delivering
convenience and service to our customers,
we will also trial up to 350 lines of branded
food and household essential items in a
number of our stores in the North East of
England from summer 2008. New lines
include Marmite and Heinz tomato ketchup,
as well as other branded ‘must haves’.

Percy Pig
superstar!

Originally the star of our 
best selling sweets, Percy
has become an iconic figure
featuring on everything from
money boxes to egg cups.
We’ve now sold over 1 billion
Percy Pigs, with two pigs
eaten every second. His fans
have also set up their very
own Facebook Appreciation
Society, registering more
than 25,000 members. 

The year in
numbers

Some 4,000 new and
improved products, 
including the new Food to
Go sandwiches and Gourmet
to Go deli salads; more 
than 100 newly trained wine
specialists; and over 300
awards for our cheese; just 
a few of the numbers behind
our growing food business.

3 fast facts on M&S food…

2

We work with specialist producers,
nurturing smaller quality
businesses at home and abroad –
our artisan chocolates by Gerard
Coleman are just one example.

1

We submit hundreds of products each
year for independent taste testing.
Products are rated on a scale of 
1 to 10, with our average score 
being 7.8 – higher than our nearest
competitor. This year we’ve achieved
a few perfect 10s including our
raspberry and panacotta terrine 
and asparagus and pecorino frittata.

3

According to independent research
by Allegra, our Fairtrade coffee
served in-store is the industry’s best.

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
18 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Sustainable sourcing

Sustainable sourcing is at the heart of our fish business, so 
that we not only protect our waters, but the communities that
depend on them.

In the UK we love cod, but we’re loving it to the point of
extinction. That’s why we’re taking action to protect it and other
endangered species. British waters provide a range of wonderful
seafood to enjoy, and we’ve been working in partnership with the
fishing industry to bring more options from the sea to the plate. 

In addition to our work in Scotland to provide sustainable farmed
Lochmuir™ salmon, we’re the largest retailer of Scottish haddock,
and we’ve also been working with the Cornish fishing industry.
For instance, an exercise in rebranding has transformed the once
unpopular pilchards fished in the shallow waters of Penzance 
and Mevagissey, into the summertime favourite – Cornish
sardines. The product was always great – it just needed a new
image. In doing this we’ve helped create a viable industry using 
a sustainable and under-utilised catch.

At the same time, we’ve been encouraging the Cornish sardine,
and other small-scale fisheries, to achieve Marine Stewardship
Council (MSC) certification. We’ve also asked our suppliers to
create more products using these species, such as Cornish
pollack – an alternative to cod and haddock. 

Other projects include the National Lobster Hatchery and ‘Meet
the Fisherman’ days in local stores such as Truro Lemon Quay,
where skippers cook sardines on the quayside and discuss
sustainable sourcing with our customers.

Steven Esom: Executive Director of Food
Steven joined M&S in June 2007 and was appointed to 
the Board as Executive Director of Food in March 2008.

When it’s 
in season, 
it’s British.

Everyday value 
As part of this move to be a more convenient
place to shop, we have reviewed the prices
of popular shopping basket items to ensure
they are competitive. These items range from
cornflakes and frozen peas, to flavoured
whole roast chickens. 

However, we firmly believe that low prices
should never be achieved through a
reduction of quality. So although we’re
responding to market demand on pricing, 
we are doing so without any loss of M&S
quality or standards. 

The return to cooking
Great food starts with great ingredients –
something our ready meals have long been
famous for. Now with more of our customers
spending longer in the kitchen, we want to
make M&S the one-stop-shop for all of their
cooking needs.

Our new ingredients range gives customers
a choice of more than 300 new ingredients –
from fresh herbs and spices like our lazy
garlic and cinnamon, to bread and cake
mixes – that make it easier to start cooking
from scratch. And it’s easier still with the help
of our M&S recipe cards. 

The best of British 
From that comfort food favourite, our
outdoor bred Lincolnshire Pork Sausages, 
to our hand-made Somerset cheddar, we 
go to great lengths to source the very best
speciality foods right on our doorstep. When
it’s in season, it’s British.

M&S is the only major retailer to stock 100%
home grown asparagus in season. We’ve
been working with British growers to extend
the season, so it lasts from April to July –
almost double the length it was five years ago.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 19

The M&S food experience
Not everyone who eats in one of our 
stores is an M&S food customer. That’s 
why by improving the breadth of our in-store
hospitality options, and achieving a balance
between healthy eating and indulgence,
we’re able to introduce new customers 
to our food. In fact, we’re one of the UK’s
fastest growing hospitality providers, with
over 12% like-for-like growth in the last year.

As part of our store modernisation
programme, in 2007/08 we increased our 
in-store hospitality offer to create a repertoire
of unique breadth and quality. We now offer
five in-store hospitality options, including 
239 cafés, 5 restaurants, 7 delis, 34 Hot
Food to Go counters and 2 M&S Kitchens. 

Within these new formats we’ve stretched
the brand even further, for example offering
kids meals in our restaurant, as well as
steaks cooked to our customers’ preference.
Our deli bars also offer the option of a glass
of champagne and a greater volume of 
fresh (and raw) ingredients, such as freshly
prepared salads. 

Internationally, we look forward to opening 
an M&S Café in our new Shanghai store 
(see page 29). 

Looking ahead
In 2008/09 we will continue to grow our 
food business in line with consumer trends
for cooking from scratch and healthy eating,
and our programme to open more space. 

Provenance and ethical sourcing remain 
high on our agenda, and we expect the Best
of British range and our expanding Eat Well
range to help us make further progress in
attracting a younger customer. Our Simply
Food business is important here, and will
work alongside our hospitality business in
helping broaden our customer base. 

Our move to become a more convenient
food shop is of increasing relevance, as 
we expand our ingredients and introduce
branded food and household items. 

Simply Food 

We’ve expanded the
presence of our Simply Food
business (see page 24) so
that our customers can now
pick up a pint of milk, or a
ready meal from 299 stores
located across the country,
including airports, train
stations, and service station
forecourts. This year we 
plan to open up to another
70 stores.

Kids count too

It’s not just food for grown-
ups where health matters –
we don’t believe in ‘dumbing
down’ our kids’ food either.
That’s why we relaunched
our entire range of children’s
products during 2007/08 
so we could ensure every
product – even treats such
as our Easter eggs (see
above) and birthday cakes 
– is completely free of
artificial additives.

This not only gives our customers more
opportunity to enjoy asparagus, but also
enables them to support farmers like John
Chinn – winner of the ‘2005 Grower of the
Year’ award for innovation. 

Additionally, all of our fresh beef comes 
from the UK, much of it from Scotland, 
and we’ve been working closely with Welsh
farmers to extend the lamb season by a 
full two months. In 2008/09 we’ll introduce
home-reared products to local stores, such
as home-reared Oakham chicken in Scotland. 

With no legally defined industry standard 
for free range pork, we decided to review 
all of the many standards and specifications,
so that we could introduce our own ‘leading
standard’. As a result we now offer in a
number of stores truly free range pork, 
which is the first step towards meeting of 
our Plan A commitment to convert all of 
our outdoor bred fresh pork to free range.

All of our food is free…
from artificial colours, flavourings,
sweeteners and hydrogenated fats; 
as part of our commitment to help 
our customers eat well. 

As of 1 April 2008 we became the first
retailer to remove all artificial colours and
flavourings from our entire food and soft
drinks range. It has taken three years to
remove artificial colours and flavourings 
from over 900 products, with some more
difficult than others. For instance, finding 
a natural colour from fruit and vegetable
extracts to replace the vibrant pink filling 
of Turkish Delight.

We’ve also made excellent progress in salt
reduction, having reached our 2010 targets
in 11 out of 15 categories, including ready
meals and sandwiches. 

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
20 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

People

As we grow our business and invest 
for the future, it’s important we keep
strengthening our team at every level, from
the shop-floor through to management. 

To attract and retain the best talent in 
the industry, we have to demonstrate 
that M&S is a good employer, committed
to making all our people feel valued and
providing them with career opportunities
and quality training. The following section
reports on how we delivered against these
objectives in 2007/08.

Training and development
Good training and a clearly defined career
path are essential to our staff. That’s why 
we have over 7,500 people in stores who
coach their colleagues so their skills are 
kept up-to-date. In our stores, most training
takes place on-the-job, since learning is
more effective in real-life situations. All new
joiners complete a thorough induction and
up to 26 weeks ongoing training – the
longest on the high street. 

We also run a number of specialist training
initiatives for people moving into senior
management roles. Additionally, more than

4,000 people completed our Buying
Academy and Food Academy courses, 
and we’re now trialling similar academies 
for womenswear and merchandising.

Valued and proud to 
work for M&S 
Our staff turnover rate is among the lowest in
the industry – 27% for customer assistants,
and 12% for management. Moreover, some
40% of our people in the UK have been 
with us for at least five years, with about 
680 celebrating 25 or 40 years service during
2007/08. For us, this is one of the clearest
signs that we’re succeeding in making our
people feel valued and proud to work for M&S. 

In addition to our commitment to providing
quality training and rewarding our people
well, we have a number of specific initiatives
designed to make them feel well cared for.
For instance, we provide free breast cancer
screening to M&S employees and pensioners
– last year we screened more than 13,000
people. The service is available from the 
age of 40 (10 years earlier than the NHS),
and can play a potentially life-saving role 
by detecting cancer early. 

Listening to 
our people

More than 3,500 employee
representatives have been
elected to sit on Business
Involvement Groups (BIGs),
representing staff views on
matters relating to work and
employment. They regularly
discuss employment issues
directly with company
management at a local,
divisional and national level. 

We also engage with
employees through our
annual YourSay survey, 
giving them the chance to 
tell us what they think about 
a range of issues – including
job satisfaction and
management performance.

Rewarding our people

25,000

Employees participated in our Sharesave Schemes 
in 2007/08, saving between £5 and £250 a month.

11,160

Employees shared a gain of £37m from the Sharesave
Scheme that matured in 2007.

40,000

Great Service Awards handed out to staff who did 
a particularly good job taking care of our customers.

Marks & Start:
breaking 
down barriers 

Many people face barriers
getting into employment. 
For groups such as disabled
or homeless people, the
difficulties are obvious, 
but we’re also concerned
with helping parents get
back into work and the
young-unemployed to get 
a job. Over the last year, 
we offered placements to
about 650 people through
the Marks & Start scheme.
Recruits were teamed with
an M&S ‘buddy’ to help
build their confidence – 
with approximately 40%
finding employment at the
end of the work placement. 

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 21

Not just any graduate career…

If you work hard at M&S, and take responsibility, you will 
be rewarded, as there are just so many opportunities to 
take your career to the next level.

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

More and more graduates are discovering that the
M&S graduate recruitment scheme is not only a fast
track to an interesting and varied career, but in some
cases, also a direct route into management.

Our graduate recruits benefit from an intensive training
course, and are given the opportunity to build their
skills in a challenging but supportive environment. They
are also assigned real responsibilities from the outset,
in order to help them make rapid progress within the
business. For example, Katie was running one of our
stores within four years. Graduates joining M&S in
other roles – food technology, design, HR, buying or 
IT – can make similarly fast progress in their careers. 

Each year we employ between 150 and 200 graduates
and business placement programme undergraduates.
In 2007/08 we received a record 8,500 applications in
just over two months. 

All of which helps to explain why we won four major
graduate recruitment awards last year, including The
Times’ ‘Graduate Employer of Choice’ for retail in 2008. 

Katie Wyle, Store Manager Brighton
Katie Wyle started at M&S as a temporary customer assistant
during Christmas 2003. The experience encouraged her to join
the M&S graduate programme, and in just four years, she had
proven her talent, stepping into her first store manager position.

Going the extra mile
Our people are passionate about what they
do. They care deeply about M&S, and want
to make a contribution that goes beyond 
just doing their job, to making a difference 
on issues that matter to them and their 
local community. 

Now in their seventh year, our national
Employee Volunteer Awards recognise 
the outstanding achievements of the 
many hundreds of staff who fundraise and
volunteer for local charities in their own time.
A special mention must be made of Jean
Turner and the Chester store team, who have
won the group fundraising category three
years running. In 2007 they did whatever it
took – selling cakes, running the ‘Great North
Run’ and even managing car boot sales – 
so they could raise more than £30,000 for 
a number of charities including their local
children’s hospice, Hope House. 

Plan A Champions

The environment and all things
green, is a particular passion
amongst our employees, which is
why we’ve appointed 570 Plan A
Champions in our stores and
offices, to keep their colleagues
updated on Plan A, and to find
innovative new ideas to implement
in-store. You can read more from
our Leeds Plan A Champion Kate
Edwards on page 30.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
22 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Service, IT
and logistics

Good service continues to be a priority 
at M&S. In addition to training and
developing our in-store staff so that they
consistently perform well, we’re also
investing behind the scenes to improve
our logistics and IT infrastructure. This
investment will allow us to efficiently run
our supply chain and IT systems so that
stock is managed tightly and transactions
are processed effectively.

Mystery shopping
Each of our stores is anonymously visited
once a month – twice in the case of our
larger flagship stores – by a mystery shopper
who evaluates service quality. In 2007/08 that
was the equivalent of some 6,240 visits to
our stores. We’re pleased with the outcome,
as our teams achieved a new record average
score – 86%. 

The mystery shopping programme was
developed in partnership with a customer
panel to help us identify where we need to
support our stores with additional training. 
As a result the questions and scoring system
accurately reflect our customers’ priorities,
such as the standard of our fitting rooms.

Supporting our growth
Supporting our people behind the scenes,
our supply chain and IT systems play a
crucial part in ensuring our stores perform
efficiently, and provide maximum customer
satisfaction. 

For our supply chain, the challenge in
2007/08 was to handle significantly increased
volumes, while remaining cost-effective.
Despite the growth of M&S Direct, increasing
sales volumes and more direct buying from
our suppliers, our supply chain coped well
under these pressures, delivering 13% more
stock to our stores, and responding to a
63% rise in volume from M&S Direct.

A more efficient future 
The majority of our supply chain’s 
physical infrastructure – the warehouses 
and distribution centres – has remained
unchanged since the 1970s. The next 
major requirement is to develop a world 
class infrastructure that will support us 
not just in the UK but around the world. 

Having formed a strategic partnership with
logistics property organisation ProLogis,
we’ve been working together to build a new
warehouse in Bradford (see picture below).
This will play an important role in increasing
the speed and efficiency of our supply chain,
and further reducing costs.

Teardrop trailers

We became the first
company in the world 
to adopt a revolutionary 
new trailer (developed by
Don-Bur) whose teardrop
shape will reduce our 
carbon footprint. 

With 141 trailers now 
on the road, our teams 
have achieved a 10%
improvement in fuel-
efficiency and a 20%
reduction in CO2 emissions
per garment moved. At the
same time, the teardrop
trailers also deliver up to
10% more load than a
conventional trailer.

86%

The average
score in our
mystery shopping
programme

New Bradford warehouse – computer generated image.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 23

Sold

Cotton fields

The t-shirts become part of 
the 4.8 million Fairtrade cotton
garments sold by M&S annually.

In-store

The t-shirts arrive in our
stores, are offloaded, and
are put on display on the
sales-floor.

We use around one third of the world’s
Fairtrade cotton. Our Fairtrade cotton
commitment directly affects the welfare 
of over 100,000 small-scale farmers, and
helps improve the standard of living in 
local communities.

From hand to hanger –
the ethical supply chain

Delivery

The t-shirts are prepped 
so they are ready for sale,
and are loaded onto lorries 
so they can be transported 
to our stores.

Factories

The cotton is
spun into yarn,
dyed and sewn 
into t-shirts to the
highest ethical
standards.

Warehouses

The t-shirts arrive in our 
UK warehouses, and the 
stores order what they need.

The plan has helped us to develop faster 
and more efficient IT systems throughout our
business. For instance, we are introducing
new point of sale systems, including more
than 2,000 new tills and 258 new handheld
terminals in-store to make stockchecking
easier and more efficient. This will help us
further improve service in our stores. We
extended the trial of our food self-service 
tills across the business, as well as a first 
trial in general merchandise.

We also made vital behind the scenes
improvements with the introduction of new
financial and back-office systems. Both of
these changes are   behind an overall increase
in operational efficiency, with 97% of our 
tills fully operational, up from 90% two 
years previously. 

At the same time as achieving these important
improvements, we also succeeded in reducing
like-for-like IT running costs by 13.5%. 

From source to store
As we expand our business internationally,
we’re planning to take more control of our
logistics from source to store, allowing us 
to monitor our stock more efficiently and
improve margins. 

We plan to develop a modern and streamlined
logistics network that consists of new overseas
warehouses, as well as offshore stockholding
and consolidation facilities. 

Remodelling our supply chain infrastructure 
is a major investment that will help us stay
one step ahead of demand in our market for
the fresh and new. Fast fashion, for example,
is about to get faster still.

Getting our IT in 
shape for growth 
At the same time as renewing our physical
network, we have also made progress in IT.
We now have an integrated company-wide 
IT plan; a three-year roadmap that sets out
how our systems will deliver on every aspect
of our business plan, both within the UK and
internationally. This means, for example, that
our IT strategy for China – where we are 
only just establishing a foothold – is already 
in place. 

Giving goes
electronic at M&S

During the year, we
introduced the electronic
M&S Gift Card. Smaller 
and more convenient for 
our customers, as well as
being quicker and easier 
to process Gift Cards have
been an important success,
with over 80% transition 
from paper to plastic.

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
24 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Property 
and store
environment

Over the last three years, we’ve
undertaken one of the biggest store
investment programmes within the UK
retail sector. We are focused on increasing
the number of stores we have; expanding
and modernising our existing footage; and
ensuring we offer our customers the right
stores in the right locations. 

In order to achieve this, in November 2007
we announced that we are expanding our
space by 15% to 20% in the next three 
to four years. We will also complete the
modernisation of our remaining store
portfolio in the next few years. 

A bigger and better M&S 
During 2007/08, we increased our total space through new openings and
extensions by 815,000 sq ft, or 4.8%. We opened more than 100 new stores 
in the UK, ranging from a large high street store at 66,000 sq ft, to Simply Food
stores of around 7,000 sq ft.

We’ve made good progress against the strategy we laid out in 2006, and in 
the year ahead we plan to accelerate our expansion, increasing our space by 
a further 5.5% in 2008/09, by moving ahead on five fronts: 

1

2

3

4

5

Expanding and modernising our city centre stores – in 2007/08 this
included Edinburgh and Belfast and in 2008/09 we will modernise our 
Cardiff store.

Opening bigger out-of-town and flagship stores of over 100,000 sq ft  
and expanding our space where we already trade – we extended London 
Colney and Lisburn in 2007/08 and in 2008/09 we opened a new store in
Colliers Wood, with White City and Brooklands to open later in the year.

Creating a better presence in retail parks – we opened seven stores in 
2007/08 including Preston, Kinnaird Park and Silverlink and have several 
more in the pipeline including Swindon Orbital and Malvern.

Examining our portfolio of high street stores to ensure they are the right 
size and in the right place – for example in 2007/08 we doubled the size 
of the Eltham store in London and relocated in Derby and High Wycombe.
In 2008/09 we will open in Luton and take two stores down to one in
Worcester.

Building on the success of Simply Food (see below).

70%

Store modernisation 
complete

Simply Food

In the last seven years, our Simply Food business has grown in the 
UK to 299 stores trading in a highly competitive market. We opened 
26 wholly-owned stores and 72 franchised stores (64 of which are 
located on BP forecourts) during 2007/08, and based on their strong
performance, we believe there is potential for up to 70 new wholly-owned 
and franchised Simply Food stores during 2008/09.

3 more green
success stories 
to build on…
1

We recycled 75% of 
all construction waste 
in 2007/08, and aim to
achieve 85% in 2008/09. 

2

How we design, 
procure and build our
stores is now clearly laid
out in our Sustainable
Construction Manual
produced in conjunction
with the Building Research
Establishment (BRE).

3

Like-for-like store energy
usage is down by 4%. 

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 25

Store modernisation
We have always acknowledged that stores
were in need of refurbishment, particularly
those which have been in our portfolio for
many years. This is important in not only
helping our stores run more efficiently, but in
ensuring they are bright and contemporary,
with easy-to-shop food halls and, to complete
the experience, a range of hospitality options. 

An award-winning
shopping experience
1

Town Centre Retailer 
of the Year Award and
Green Award 2007 – at
the Retail and Leisure
Property Awards
organised by Property
Week.

In 2007/08 we completed work on 86 stores,
(excluding franchise openings), relaunching
about 5 million sq ft. This means that 70% 
of all our space is now in the new improved
format. Inevitably the work caused some
disruption in stores, but trading generally 
held up well, with the new format stores 
out-performing non-modernised stores. Our
target is to modernise the remaining 30% in the
next few years, with 10% planned in 2008/09.

2

Department Store Interior
of the Year Award 2007 
– for M&S Bluewater,
against 550 other
contenders, at the 
10th Annual Retail
Interior awards. 

3

Convenience Chain of
the Year for Simply Food
– Checkout Magazine.

A greener way to shop

In September 2007, we opened the first of our new 
‘eco stores’. Located in Bournemouth, we deliberately
decided to modernise one of our older stores, to find
out how eco-friendly we could make it. 

Rising to the challenge, we incorporated a wide range
of eco-features – from a green roof to capture airborne
pollutants and escalators running at reduced voltage, 
to more efficient heating, lighting and refrigeration
systems. In this way, we hope to achieve energy
savings of up to 55%.

Following Bournemouth, we opened a further two 
green stores: at Silverburn in Pollok (pictured below)
and a new Simply Food in Galashiels. 

As we continue to introduce more ‘eco stores’, we’ll 
be testing a number of cutting edge techniques, such
as using hempcrete – which uses hemp plant fibres 
as the aggregate – instead of concrete. We’ll continue
to trial many further innovations to ensure that as our
property portfolio grows larger it also grows greener. 

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
26 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

M&S Direct

A new website and an extended range 
of products are just two of the reasons
behind M&S Direct’s strong growth. 

M&S Direct is an important part of our
commitment to becoming a multi-channel
retailer. In addition to providing our 
e-commerce website, it also includes our
home catalogue, flower and wine delivery,
Christmas hamper delivery, in-store food
ordering service and Lunch to Go, which
delivers lunchtime platters. 

Sales were up £60m in 2007/08 to £220m,
with M&S Direct growing faster than the
market, and putting us on course to achieve
our target of £500m in sales through M&S
Direct by the end of 2010/11. 

Visits to the website were also up by 
nearly 60%.

A new site, a new experience
Relaunched at the end of March 2007, our
website was designed and developed in
partnership with world leaders in e-commerce,
Amazon. Our customers tell us they find the
new site much easier to use; a fact reflected
in an independent online shopper survey 
by Forsee ranking the ‘Top 30’ UK online
retailers. We came sixth overall and were the
best performing high street retailer, ahead of
competitors like John Lewis, Tesco and Next. 

63%

Sales increase

Spoilt for choice 

Each year we move closer towards becoming a true multi-channel retailer, by offering our customers
more ways to shop. For instance, a customer might see a sofa they like in our home catalogue, and
decide to try it out in-store. They then have the choice of visiting our website, where they can see
every sofa, in every fabric, size or colour combination – as many as 10,000 variations. 

Blooming 
good idea

We continue to extend not
just the breadth, but the
quality of our online offer.
For instance, we’re now
bringing the luxurious quality
and style of the Autograph
brand to a bouquet, with the
launch of Autograph Flowers
in-store and online. Just 
like our Autograph fashion
and home collections, this
exclusive range of flowers
will change seasonally,
offering extra-long stems
(60-80cm) and larger blooms
in striking arrangements –
from £35 for a dozen and
£45 for two dozen. 

Each flower is individually
selected by M&S Flower
Specialist Claire Broomhead,
so they are as competitive as
those you’d buy in a florist.

The Autograph
brand is about
effortless style
and luxury and
the new range
of Autograph
Flowers reflects
this perfectly,
either as a 
gift, or as 
an amazing
centrepiece 
in the home.

Claire Broomhead
M&S Flower Specialist

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 27

Greener living:
now easier online

In 2007/08 we introduced 
a Greener Living section 
to our website so that we
could make it easier for our
customers to find products
that will help them to do
their bit for the planet. 
From compost bins and
Hippo Water Savers to
recycled fleeces and
Fairtrade t-shirts, a more
eco-friendly lifestyle is just 
a couple of clicks away. 

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

Extending our online cellar

From around just 30 lines last year, the 
range of wines available on our website 
has increased to around 550. Fifty of 
these are exclusive to the web and can’t be
found in-store. We sell over 20 varieties of
champagne with prices from approximately
£100 to £240 per case. Customer response 
to our improved online offering has been 
so positive that we’re planning to launch 
a wine club in 2008/09.

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

But there’s still plenty of room for improvement.
In particular, we want to make the site more
interactive. We’ve already added features 
such as a behind-the-scenes video interview
with Lily Cole (the face of Limited Collection).
Additionally, we publish beauty tips and lingerie
advice from the Your M&S magazine editor
Sarah Gowland. In 2008/09, we’re planning 
to add even more of these features, including
areas for customers to post reviews and
ratings of M&S products. 

More reasons to visit 
Our website offers a number of exclusive
products, including a wider choice of electricals
than in-store, an increased selection in clothing
ranges such as per una, and our exclusive
online range of affordable and contemporary
furniture called Furniture to Go.

Our new Made to Measure shirts service,
which launched in November 2007, allows
customers to design a tailor-made shirt from 
just £30 for delivery within 21 days. Customers
simply choose their fabric, collar, cuffs, 
pocket, fit and monogramming, and type 
in their height, collar size and weight, and 
we’ll tailor-make a shirt specifically for them. 

A number of other popular features on our
website include our Greener Living shop,
improved wine cellar and Big and Tall range.

Big and Tall

I usually have to look for specialists that 
cater for big fellas, and then end up choosing
from a small range and paying a lot more.
When M&S approached me I was amazed 
at the offer available, with excellent quality at
the same price as standard sized clothes.
Martin Johnson, England Rugby Team Manager

It would be hard to find space in our stores for our exclusive Big and Tall offer, 
but it’s a perfect fit online. As the name suggests, Big and Tall offers clothes to 
fit ‘big fellas’, like England Rugby Team Manager Martin Johnson who is the 
face of the brand. Only available online, the collection includes more than 
450 items ranging from tailoring to knitwear to casual shirts and trousers.

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

 
 
 
 
 
One of the most exciting examples of this
new plan can be seen in India, where in April
2008 we announced our intention to open 
up to 50 new stores in the next five years
with Reliance Retail. 

At the end of 2007/08 we also completed 
two deals in Europe with existing franchise
partners. The first in February 2008 was 
with the Marinopoulos Group, the leading
private company in Greece. Marinopoulos has
been our franchise partner for 30 years and
currently operates 38 M&S stores in Greece
and the Balkan states, including Romania and
Bulgaria, as well as Switzerland. The €50m
deal to acquire a 50% share of the business
will see an additional 50 new stores opened in
these markets over the next few years.

The second deal was signed in March 
2008 with another existing franchise partner 
– COMS a.s – to expand in Central and
Eastern Europe. With a 51% stake in the
partnership, we will work to open around 
30 new stores in the Czech Republic,
Slovakia, Latvia, Lithuania and Estonia 
over the next few years.

Investing in Ireland

In 2007/08 we opened four
new stores in the Republic
of Ireland bringing the
portfolio up to 17 stores in
total. The pipeline of future
developments is strong, and
we expect to add between
30% and 40% to our footage
in the next few years. 

16.8%

Sales increase

28 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

International

In 2007/08 we announced plans to grow our
International business to between 15% and
20% of total Group revenues within the next
five years. 

We’re pleased to report strong progress
towards this goal. Not only have we
expanded our franchise operation, but 
we have also entered into partnerships 
in some of the world’s most dynamic
emerging economies.

A growing contribution
In 2007/08 our International business
contributed over 7.9% of total Group
turnover. At £712.9m, sales were up 
16.8% on last year, and operating profit 
was up 33% to £116.4m. 

During the year, we increased our overseas
stores by 38 bringing the total to 278, 
and increased our space by over 18% to
almost 266,400 sq m. In 2007/08 we entered
Lithuania, Serbia, Taiwan and Ukraine, taking
our global reach to 39 territories. 

A flexible business model
Our expansion to date has been primarily
through franchising which remains our
preferred model for smaller or particularly
challenging markets.

Looking ahead though, we intend to invest
our own capital to increase returns to our
shareholders. In some cases we will invest
alongside partners who will bring local
knowledge and expertise. In other markets
we may choose to go it alone.

Expanding in India

One of the world’s fastest growing economies, India is expected to become the world’s
fifth largest consumer market by 2025 (McKinsey). With an estimated 350 million 
middle-class consumer base by 2015, India presents an exciting opportunity for growth. 

Whilst we have traded in India for a number of years through a franchise agreement, 
in view of the long term opportunity, we set out to find a new partner who could help 
us grow in the market. One organisation stood out from the crowd, and in April 2008 
we entered into a partnership with Reliance Retail, subject to the approval of the Indian
Government’s Foreign Investment Promotion Board and certain other conditions.
Reliance has great strength in technology, logistics and property in India.

With a 51% stake in the venture, we will work with Reliance to open around 50 new,
stores in the next five years. The new stores will sell a wider range of products than
previously, and at lower prices, including a full range of clothing and homeware, and 
a growing number of products sourced from local suppliers.

IND IA

April
2008

51%

30-50

Deal signed 
with Reliance
Retail

Stake in
partnership

New stores 
in the next 
five years

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 29

Global emerging
markets

55 stores

CENTRAL AND EASTERN EUROPE

50 new stores across the 
region in the next few years

LATVIA

LITHUANIA

POLAND

CZECH REP.

SLOVAKIA

SWITZERLAND

HUNGARY

UKRAINE

SLOVENIA

CROATIA

ROMANIA

SERBIA

BULGARIA

RUSSIA

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

GIBRALTAR

GREECE

TURKEY

MALTA

CYPRUS

TENERIFE

GRAN CANARIA

88 stores

MEDITERRANEAN

CHINA

SOUTH KOREA

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

TAIWAN

HONG KONG

THAILAND

PHILIPPINES

MALAYSIA

SINGAPORE

INDONESIA

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

INDIA

14 stores

76 stores

INDIAN SUBCONTINENT

FAR EAST

We expect to open a further 
30 to 50 stores in the next 
five years

First flagship store in Shanghai 
to open later this year

A global fashion brand
From Singapore to Switzerland, we work 
with our overseas partners to ensure brand
consistency. Our International merchandisers
work closely with our UK-based buying
teams to ensure the products selected 
reflect the key M&S looks for the season. 
Our advertising and branding has also proven 
to be highly relevant overseas. For instance,
we are replicating our holiday campaign
throughout Europe and the rest of the world
this summer.

A foothold in China 
Drawing on our experience in Hong Kong –
where we have eight wholly-owned stores
and have been trading for 20 years – 
in November 2007 we announced our
intention to enter the Chinese market 
on a wholly-owned basis. 

Having secured a 4,836 sq m store in
Shanghai, we look forward to opening our
first store in China – a new flagship for M&S
in Asia. We will adapt our ranges, introducing
smaller sizes into womenswear and 2-inch
shorter sleeve shirts in menswear, as we do in
Hong Kong. We’ll also stock the Asia special
– redcurrant puffs – in the food section. 

Looking ahead…
While the economic outlook remains
uncertain, our International business model
gives us an opportunity to build a broader
revenue base and drive profitable growth in
some of the world’s most exciting emerging
markets. We have a strong pipeline of
International openings planned for 2008/09,
demonstrating the important role that
International will play in positioning M&S 
for future growth.

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

17 stores

MIDDLE EAST

KUWAIT

BAHRAIN

QATAR

UNITED ARAB 
EMIRATES

SAUDI 
ARABIA

OMAN

A taste of Britain

In 2007/08 we started to
freeze our ready meals 
for international sale and
have launched a range of 
70 lines in eight countries.
The new category has 
been well received, and 
we are presently working 
on extending the range 
and the numbers of stores
carrying the lines. The frozen
ready meals, which include
pizzas, rhubarb crumble and
traditional marinated curries,
are prepared in the UK and
join the growing range of
1,200 ambient products
already on sale in a number
of overseas stores. Our
ambient products include 
a number of everyday 
items, and
traditional
British
favourites,
such as
shortbread
biscuits.

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
30 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Plan A

Plan A is our five-year ‘eco plan’ to
address some of the key social and
environmental challenges facing M&S. 
We pledged to meet 100 separate Plan A
commitments within five years, and so 
far we have made progress on 94 of the
100 commitments.

By 2012 M&S will:

(cid:129) become carbon neutral with minimal

offsetting;

(cid:129) send no waste to landfill from our operations;
(cid:129) extend sustainable sourcing;
(cid:129) set new standards in ethical trading; and
(cid:129) help customers and employees live a

healthier lifestyle.

We’re committed to Plan A, because it’s 
the right thing to do. There’s also a powerful
business case. Plan A not only gives us
distinction in a crowded marketplace, but
challenges us to increase efficiencies, and

Banish the bag

continually seek new and better ways of
doing business, so that we can achieve the
ambitious targets we have set ourselves. 

Climate change 
Despite opening more than 100 new stores 
in 2007/08, we cut our total CO2 emissions
from our stores, offices and warehouses 
by nearly 50,000 tonnes. We achieved this
9% decrease on last year by switching an
additional 21% of our electricity to renewable
sources. We also improved our energy
efficiency by 4%, and started sourcing
electricity from farm-based wind turbines 
and an anaerobic digestion facility which
generates power from food waste. 

Because around 60% of our carbon 
footprint is generated by our suppliers, 
and a further 30% by our customers, 
we’ve been looking closely at how we can
encourage our suppliers to reduce their CO2
emissions. For example, we encouraged the
development of low carbon supplier factories
(see story to right). 

The carrier bag initiative has been a big hit with
our customers who want to do their bit to make
a difference. We can’t wait to start working with
Groundwork in Leeds so we can begin to see
changes here in the local area.

One of our highest profile projects in 2007/08 was
undoubtedly our decision to introduce a food carrier 
bag charge of 5p in all of our UK stores, with profits
funding local environmental projects run by our partner
Groundwork UK. 

Initial trials in more than 50 M&S stores in Northern
Ireland and the South West, showed around a 70% 
drop in plastic carrier bag usage, and raised over
£80,000 to create and improve green spaces in local
neighbourhoods. If M&S customers continue
at this rate, we’ll save over 250 million bags 
from landfill every year.

Kate Edwards, Plan A 
Champion for Leeds store
Kate joined M&S as customer assistant
in 2003 at the Blackburn store before
moving to the Leeds store in 2004. 
As a Plan A Champion, on top of 
her everyday job as store operations
manager, it’s her role to motivate some
350 staff to ‘think green’. She’s pictured
with the M&S cotton shoppers.

Green from top
to bottom

We worked in collaboration
with two suppliers – MAS
Holdings and Brandix – to
launch two eco clothing
factories, which will use
40% less energy and half 
as much water as typical
supplier factories. From July,
customers can buy lingerie
made from these factories,
under our Autograph and
per una labels. We hope to
open a similar plant later 
this year in Wales. 

Wash at 30

As part of the Climate
Group’s ‘Together’
campaign, we’re
encouraging our customers
to save energy by washing
their laundry at 30ºC. By
introducing ‘Think Climate –
Wash at 30’ labels in 70% 
of our clothes and on our
washing powder, we’ve 
seen the number of washes
now done at 30ºC increase
by 23% to 31% since 
April 2007. That’s a total
reduction of 25,000 tonnes
in CO2 emissions.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 31

Fairtrade commodity crops such as sugar
and tea. Additionally we are extending our
Fairtrade ranges of jams. 

The Fairtrade premium improves the standard
of living in the local communities funding the
building of schools, healthcare clinics and
transport links. 

Health
One of our most significant achievements 
for the year is our commitment that all food
produced after 1 April 2008 is now entirely
free of artificial flavours and colouring.
Originally, we planned to only do this with 
our children’s food, but having completed 
this work by September 2007, we decided 
to extend it to all foods. Page 19 details our
greatly increased range of Eat Well healthier
options, as well as our excellent progress in
salt reduction.

Plan A: next steps 
We’ve achieved a great deal, and learned
even more during our first full year as a Plan A
business. But we know that there’s a lot to do
if we are to achieve our five-year targets. 

Plan A isn’t perfect, and we revisited 
our ethical trading commitments to make
them stronger. We will continue to review 
our progress and where we need to, change
our commitments to meet emerging issues. 

In 2008/09 we will develop better, more
robust systems for gathering the data we
need to evaluate and improve our Plan A
performance. We’ll also be working harder
than ever to develop partnerships that
communicate our messages or help us 
to find innovative solutions.

For more detailed information, please visit our 
Plan A website at marksandspencer.com/planA
or download our 2007/08 How we do business
report at marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

Waste 
Right across our business, we’ve been
finding new ways to ensure that by 2012 
we send zero waste to landfill from our 
own operations. We’ve seen a 6% reduction
in the amount of waste sent to landfill, as 
a result of improving the recycling of our
construction waste (see page 24), and
collecting 122 million clothing hangers to
reuse and recycle – over double the amount
collected last year.

In January 2008, we launched the M&S 
and Oxfam Clothes Exchange – calling on
customers to dig deep into their wardrobes
to help fight poverty. Customers taking M&S
items to an Oxfam store will help reduce the
1 million tonnes of clothing going to landfill
each year, and in doing so will receive a 
£5 (€7) M&S discount voucher to spend 
on purchases of £35 (€50) or more. 

One of the biggest challenges we face is to
reduce our packaging, but without making 
our products susceptible to damage, or in 
the case of food, reducing their freshness. In
2007/08 we reduced the weight of packaging
around each Easter egg by nearly 20%. At 
the same time, we’ve increased the amount of
our food packaging that is recyclable to 70%.

Sustainable raw materials
During the year we converted all our 
toilet rolls, kitchen rolls and tissues to 
either Forestry Stewardship Council (FSC)
certified or recycled paper. We also used
FSC materials for more than 50% of our
range of Christmas greeting cards (over 
30 million in total) as well as our publications
for customers, including the ‘Your M&S’
magazine. In total 62% of current wood
materials used in M&S products are: FSC
certified, certified by another independent
organisation, or recycled (excluding fabrics).

Fair partner
We use around one third of the world’s
Fairtrade cotton. We are working with local
communities and organisations around the
world, such as the Fairtrade Foundation, 
to increase the availability of this and other

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Fancy a cuppa?

Already, 100% of the tea and
coffee we sell is Fairtrade;
and we’re pleased to have
recently launched a new
range of single origin
Fairtrade coffees from
Rwanda, as part of 
Fairtrade Fortnight.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

Award-winning
work
1

We were awarded the
World Environment
Center’s (WEC) 24th
Annual Gold Medal for
International Corporate
Achievement in
Sustainable
Development, for
linking sustainability
with our supply chain,
operations and
customers.

2

3

4

We were named joint
leaders in the Marine
Conservation Society’s
supermarket league
table on responsible
fish sourcing.

We won the RSPCA
‘Good Business’ award
for animal welfare in
fashion for the third
consecutive year.

We were named
Compassionate
Supermarket of the
Year for 2007 – not 
just because all of our
eggs are free range,
but because we only
sell UK reared veal
which meets high
animal welfare
standards.

 
 
 
 
 
32 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Your Board

On 10 March 2008 we announced that with effect from 1 June 2008, 
Lord Burns will stand down as Chairman, Sir Stuart Rose will be appointed
Executive Chairman and Sir David Michels will be appointed Deputy Chairman
whilst continuing his role as senior independent director. Sir David Michels will
become Chairman of the Nomination Committee on 1 June 2008.

Lord Burns Chairman ▲ (Chairman) 
Appointed in October 2005, becoming Chairman 
in July 2006. Age 64. Lord Burns will retire as
Chairman on 1 June 2008. He is Chairman of
Abbey National plc and Glas Cymru Ltd (Welsh
Water) and a non-executive director of Banco
Santander SA and Pearson Group plc. He is a
former non-executive director of Legal & General plc
and The British Land Company plc and a former
Chairman of the National Lottery Commission. 
He was Permanent Secretary to HM Treasury from
1991 to 1998 and Chief Economic Advisor from
1980 to 1991. He was appointed a Life Peer in 1998.

Sir Stuart Rose Chief Executive ▲
Appointed in May 2004. Age 59. Stuart will be
appointed Executive Chairman on 1 June 2008. 
He is a non-executive director of Land Securities plc
and Chairman of Business in the Community. Stuart
began his career in retail at Marks & Spencer in
1972 before going on to the Burton Group in 1989.
He left the Group following the demerger in 1997.
Stuart was Chief Executive of Argos plc in 1998 and
later became Chief Executive of Booker plc. Before
rejoining Marks & Spencer as Chief Executive in
2004 he was Chief Executive of Arcadia Group plc
from 2000 until 2002. Stuart was knighted in the
New Year Honours List this year, for his services to
the retail industry and corporate social responsibility.

Kate Bostock Executive Director, Clothing
Appointed in March 2008. Age 51. Kate joined
Marks & Spencer in October 2004. Previously Kate
was Product Director for Childrenswear at Next
before joining Asda in 2001 as Product Director for
the George brand covering all areas of clothing and
footwear. She was responsible for the launch of the
stand-alone George concept and the launch of the
George brand globally. 

Ian Dyson Group Finance and 
Operations Director 
Appointed in June 2005. Age 45. Ian was appointed
Group Finance Director in June 2005, becoming
Group Finance and Operations Director in March
2008. Ian was formerly Finance Director of The
Rank Group plc. Prior to this he was Group
Financial Controller of Hilton Group plc. He joined
Hilton from Le Meridien, a division of Forte plc,
where he had been Finance Director. His early
career was spent with Arthur Andersen, where he
qualified as a Chartered Accountant in 1986 and
was promoted to a Partner of the firm in 1994. 
Ian was a non-executive director of Misys plc until
September 2005.

Steven Esom Executive Director, Food
Appointed in March 2008. Age 47. Steven is a 
non-executive director of The Carphone Warehouse
Group plc. He joined Marks & Spencer in June 2007
from Waitrose where he had been the Managing
Director. Steven joined the John Lewis Partnership
in 1996 as Director of Buying at Waitrose. He spent
his early career at J Sainsbury’s in various buying
roles. In 1993 Steven was appointed Buying and
Merchandising Director for Texas Homecare, later
becoming Vice-President – Global Merchandising 
at Hilton International. 

Steven Sharp Executive Director, Marketing
Appointed in November 2005. Age 57. Steven
joined Marks & Spencer in May 2004. He started his
career with Bejam in 1978, progressing to the Argyll
Group and became Marketing Director of Asda in
1987. He joined the Board of Debenhams in 1989.
He later became Marketing Director of the Burton
Group, Booker plc and Arcadia Group plc. Steven 
is a non-executive director of Adnams plc. He is a
Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Marketing, The
Marketing Society and The Royal Society of Arts, as
well as a visiting Professor of Glasgow Caledonian
University. Steven is a special advisor to the Tate
Members’ Council.

Sir David Michels 
Senior Independent Director ❋ ● ■ ▲ 
Appointed in March 2006. Age 61. David will be
appointed Deputy Chairman and Chairman of the
Nomination Committee on 1 June 2008. He was
appointed senior independent director in September
2006. He is senior independent director of easyJet
plc, and is also a non-executive director of Strategic
Hotels & Resorts and Jumeriah Group, Dubai. He 
is resigning as a senior independent director of The
British Land Company plc and was a non-executive
director of RAB Capital plc until 18 April 2008. 
David spent his early career employed by Grand
Metropolitan, Ladbrokes and Stakis before rejoining
Hilton/Ladbrokes in 1999 as Chief Executive,
becoming Chief Executive of Hilton Group plc from
2000 to 2006. David was knighted in June 2006.

Jeremy Darroch 
Non-Executive Director ❋ ▲ ● (Chairman)
Appointed in February 2006. Age 45. Jeremy was
appointed Chairman of the Audit Committee in
September 2006. He was appointed the Chief
Executive of British Sky Broadcasting Plc in
December 2007 having been the Chief Financial
Officer since 2004. Jeremy was previously Group
Finance Director and Retail Finance Director at
Dixons Group plc. He spent 12 years at Procter &
Gamble in a variety of roles, becoming European
Finance Director for their Healthcare division. He
qualified as a chartered accountant with Deloitte
Haskins and Sells. 

Martha Lane Fox 
Non-Executive Director ❋ ● ■ ▲
Appointed on 1 June 2007. Age 35. Martha is a
non-executive director of Channel 4 Television and 
a Trustee of the charity Reprieve. She is founder of 
a chain of private room karaoke clubs, Lucky Voice,
and of her own grant giving foundation, Antigone.
Martha is also a director of mydeco.com. She 
co-founded lastminute.com in 1998, taking the
Company public in March 2000, remaining on the
Board until the company was purchased by Sabre
Holdings in 2005. Martha is also a patron of
CAMFED.

Steven Holliday 
Non-Executive Director ❋ ● ■ ▲ 
Appointed in July 2004. Age 51. Steven was
appointed Group CEO of National Grid plc at 
the end of 2006, having at different times been
responsible for the UK Electricity and Gas
businesses. He was formerly an executive director 
of British Borneo Oil and Gas. Previously, he spent
19 years with the Exxon Group where he held
numerous senior positions. His international
experience includes a four-year spell in the US.
Steven has also developed business opportunities in
countries such as China, Australia, Japan and Brazil.

Louise Patten 
Non-Executive Director ❋ ▲ ■ (Chairman)
Appointed in February 2006. Age 54. Louise was
appointed Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
in January 2007. She is non-executive Chairman 
of Brixton plc, a non-executive director of Bradford
& Bingley plc and a senior adviser to Bain & Co.
Louise began her career at Citibank and remained in
financial services until 1993 when she joined Bain &
Co as a Partner. She was formerly a non-executive
director of Hilton Group plc, GUS plc, Somerfield plc
and Harveys Furnishings plc.

Graham Oakley 
Group Secretary and Head of Corporate Governance

Independent
❋
● Audit Committee
■ Remuneration Committee
▲ Nomination Committee 

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 33

Financial review

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Revenue

2008
2007

Total
Like-for-like

Operating profit

UK Retail
£8,309.1m
£7,977.5m

+4.2%
-0.5%

International Retail
£712.9m
£610.6m

+16.8%
+6.6%

2008
2007

Total

UK Retail
£972.9m
£956.5m

International Retail
£116.4m
£87.5m

+1.7%

+33.0%

Revenues
Total revenues were up 5.1% driven by new space in the 
UK and strong performance in our International business.

UK revenues were up 4.2% in total with like-for-like decline of
0.5%. The performance in the first half of the year was strong,
despite the unseasonable weather and significant disruption
from our modernisation programme. However, in the second
half of the year the deterioration in the economic environment and
consumer spending had an adverse impact on our performance. 

During the year, we added 4.8% of space (on a weighted
average basis), 8.7% in food and 3.0% in general merchandise. 

International revenues were up 16.8% with good performances
in both owned and franchised stores, up 15.5% and 18.7%
respectively. This was driven by both strong like-for-like
performance and 38 new store openings. 

Operating profit
Operating profit before property disposals and exceptional
items was £1,089.3m, up 4.3%.

In the UK, operating profit before property disposals and
exceptional items was up 1.7% at £972.9m. The UK gross
margin was 0.4 percentage points down on the year at 43.0%,
mostly due to a greater proportion of food sales in the overall
mix. General merchandise gross margin was level on the year
at 52.6%, with further improvement in primary margin being 
offset by higher markdowns. Food gross margin was 0.1
percentage point lower than last year at 33.9% due to higher
waste and the growth in franchised Simply Food stores which
generate a lower gross margin. The net operating margin for
franchised stores is above that achieved by owned Simply
Food stores.

UK operating costs were up 4.3% to £2,630.0m. A breakdown
of UK operating costs is shown below:

52 weeks ended

29 March 
2008
£m

31 March 
2007
£m

% increase/
(decrease)

Retail staffing
Retail occupancy
Distribution
Marketing and related
Support

Total before bonus
Bonus

834.8
841.4
383.8
144.6
408.9

819.5
750.4
329.7
137.5
394.6

2,613.2
16.8

2,431.7
91.0

Total including bonus

2,630.0

2,522.7

+ 1.9
+ 12.1
+16.4
+ 5.2
+ 3.5

+ 7.5
– 81.5

+ 4.3

Despite the step up in space growth, retail staffing costs 
were well controlled, in response to the more difficult trading
environment experienced over the year. Our mystery shop
scores, which measure the quality of service in stores, continue
to be very strong. The increase in retail occupancy costs reflects
both space growth and the increased depreciation related to
the modernisation programme. Increase in distribution costs
reflects growth in both general merchandise and food volumes,
as well as furniture order deliveries. Growth in marketing
expenditure reflects higher in-store marketing costs due to 
new store openings and modernisations. Support costs, which
include non-store related overheads, were well controlled.

We will be paying a bonus of £16.8m for 2007/08 (last year
£91.0m). The level of bonus payment reflects performance
against our original operating plan.

The UK operating profit includes a contribution of £28.3m 
(last year £19.5m) from the Group’s continuing economic
interest in M&S Money. 

International operating profit before property disposals was
£116.4m, up 33.0%, reflecting the strong sales performance 
of the business. Owned store operating profits decreased 
by 2.0% to £44.5m, largely due to the Republic of Ireland
where operating results were affected by new store opening
costs, and start up losses relating to Taiwan. Franchise
operating profits grew by 70.8% to £71.9m reflecting strong
sales and margin performance.

Profit on property disposals
Profit on property disposals was £27.0m (last year £1.9m). 
This relates to proceeds from the sale of stores where we 
have relocated, or plan to relocate at a later date.

Exceptional items
The exceptional pension credit of £95.0m (last year £nil) has
arisen due to the changes made in the terms of the UK defined
benefit plan relating to how members’ future benefits build up
from 1 October 2007. To the extent that members have chosen
the option to limit their future pensionable salary increases 
in line with inflation, there is a past service credit to reflect the
impact of adjusting their projected final pensionable salaries.

Net finance costs
Net interest payable was up 15.8% at £113.8m (last year
£98.3m) reflecting an increase in the average net debt for 
the year. Consequently, net finance costs before exceptional
items were up 4.3% after pension finance income of £58.9m
(last year £20.8m) and the unwinding of the discount on the
partnership liability to the pension scheme. Despite widening
credit spreads within the debt capital markets and rising 
short-term LIBOR rates the Group’s average cost of funding
remained level on the year at 5.9%.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
34 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Financial review

continued

Taxation
The taxation charge reflects a pre-exceptional effective tax 
rate of 27.0% for the full year (last year 29.4%). The decrease
reflects a restatement of UK deferred tax liabilities resulting
from the reduction in Corporation tax rates on 1 April 2008,
and a prior year credit. The 2008/09 tax rate is expected 
to be 28.0%.

Earnings per share
Adjusted earnings per share from continuing operations, which
excludes the effect of property disposals and exceptional items,
increased by 7.9% to 43.6p per share. The weighted average
number of shares in issue during the period was 1,671.3m 
(last year 1,688.6m). 

Dividends
The Board is recommending a final dividend of 14.2p per
share. This will result in a total dividend of 22.5p, an increase 
of 23.0%. This reflects a base uplift of 15% on the prior year
dividend plus the growth in adjusted earnings per share. In
2008/09 the Board will return to its existing policy of growing
dividends broadly in line with adjusted earnings per share.

Share buy back
In November 2007 we announced our intention to purchase 
up to 10% of the Company’s issued share capital, using the
authority given by shareholders at the AGM in July 2007. 
As at 29 March 2008, we had bought back a total of c126m
shares for cancellation, for a total consideration of £555.9m.
This represents 7.4% of the shares in issue in July 2007. We
intend to complete the 10% buy back programme during the
summer of 2008.

Capital expenditure
Investing in the business continues to be a key part of our
strategy. Capital expenditure for the year was £1,054.5m
compared with £792.4m last year. 

Group capital expenditure

Actual
2006/07

Actual
2007/08

£m
750

600

450

300

150

0

479

536

120

114

27

l

a
n
o
i
t
a
n
r
e
t
n

I

52

e
c
n
a
n
e
t
n
a
M

i

i

n
a
h
c

l

y
p
p
u
S

l

y
g
o
o
n
h
c
e
t
d
n
a

e
m
m
a
r
g
o
r
p

i

n
o
i
t
a
s
n
r
e
d
o
M

s
e
r
o
t
s
w
e
N

203

e
m
m
a
r
g
o
r
p

i

n
o
i
t
a
s
n
r
e
d
o
M

s
e
r
o
t
s
w
e
N

162

106

i

n
a
h
c

l

y
p
p
u
S

l

y
g
o
o
n
h
c
e
t
d
n
a

e
c
n
a
n
e
t
n
a
M

i

48

l

a
n
o
i
t
a
n
r
e
t
n

I

The increased spend on the modernisation programme reflects
a record 35% of our space being developed or modernised,
including of a number of significant projects such as Belfast,
Edinburgh, London Colney, Braehead and Cheshunt. Capital
expenditure on new stores was up to £203.1m reflecting the
increase in new space coming on stream. We stepped up 
the investment in our supply chain and technology with the 
roll-out of the POS system in stores and investment in further
distribution capacity.

Cash flow and net debt 
The Group reported a net cash outflow of £917.5m (last 
year inflow £231.1m). Cash inflow from continuing operations
decreased by £206.6m, reflecting a higher working capital
outflow due to the timing of pension payments, the 2006/07
bonus, increased investment in inventories and leasehold
prepayments in respect of new stores. Cash outflow on 
capital expenditure, net of disposals, was £927.4m (last year
£710.5m) reflecting increased investment in our modernisation
programme, as well as more aggressive new space growth. We
generated £91.6m during the year from the disposal of properties.

On 28 February 2008, the Group acquired Board control and
50% of the issued share capital of the Marinopoulos Group,
located in Greece, Bulgaria, Croatia, Romania, Serbia and
Switzerland for cash consideration of £38.1m, transaction
costs of £0.8m and net cash acquired of £2.0m. On 20 March
2008, the Group acquired 51% of the issued share capital of
COMS a.s., located in the Czech Republic, Latvia, Lithuania
and Slovakia for cash consideration of £10.6m, transaction
costs of £0.8m and net cash acquired of £1.9m.

Pensions 
At 29 March 2008 the IAS 19 net retirement benefit surplus
was £483.5m (last year deficit £283.3m). The change is due 
to a £95m decrease in the liabilities arising from the change 
in the UK defined benefit plan, as well as the increase in the
discount rate used to calculate the liability at the year end 
in accordance with the accounting standard. The year end
discount rate, which was 6.8% (last year 5.3%), reflects
corporate bond rates at the year end and has led to a
significant reduction in the IAS 19 calculation of the pension
liability for accounting purposes at 29 March 2008.

The partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension
scheme of £723.2m (last year £496.9m) relates to the
amortising liability in respect of the obligations to the Marks 
& Spencer UK Pension Scheme. The increase in the liability 
is due to the decision by the Group to pre-fund £200m of its
annual contributions to the pension scheme, by placing £400m
of additional properties into the partnership established with
the Pension Scheme in 2007. The impact of the transaction will
be to increase the annual distribution out of the partnership to
the pension scheme by £21.9m for the 14-year period from
July 2009.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 35

Group Directors’ report

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Business review
The Companies Act 1985 requires the Company to set out in
this report, a fair review of the business of the Group during the
financial year ended 29 March 2008, including an analysis of
the position of the Group at the end of the financial year, and 
a description of the principal risks and uncertainties facing the
Group (known as a ‘Business review’). 

The information that fulfils the Business review requirements
can be found in the following sections of this report. All the
information detailed in these sections is incorporated by reference
into this report and deemed to form part of this report:

(cid:129) Chairman’s foreword on page 4;

(cid:129) Chief Executive’s statement on pages 5 to 8;

(cid:129) Group Finance and Operations Director’s statement 

on page 9;

(cid:129) Financial review on pages 33 and 34;

(cid:129) Principal risks and uncertainties on pages 44 and 45;

(cid:129) Key performance indicators on pages 2 and 3; and

(cid:129) Environmental, employee and social and community matters

on pages 30 and 31 and within the How we do business report
available on our website at
marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

Pages 35 to 38 inclusive (together with the sections of the
Annual report incorporated by reference) consist of a Group
Directors’ report that has been drawn up and presented in
accordance with, and in reliance upon applicable English
company law and the liabilities of the directors in connection
with that report shall be subject to the limitations and
restrictions provided by such law.

Principal activities 
Marks and Spencer Group plc is the holding company of 
the Marks & Spencer Group of companies (the ‘Group’). 
We are one of the UK’s leading retailers, with over 21 million
people visiting our stores each week. We offer stylish, high
quality, great value clothing and home products, as well as
outstanding quality food, responsibly sourced from around
2,000 suppliers globally. We employ over 75,000 people 
in the UK and abroad, and have 622 UK stores, including
Simply Food franchised stores, as well as an expanding
international business.

Profit and dividends
The profit for the financial year, after taxation, non-equity
dividends and minority interests amounts to £821.7m (last year
£659.9m). The directors have declared dividends as follows:

Ordinary shares
Paid interim dividend of 8.3p per share 
(last year 6.3p per share)
Proposed final dividend of 14.2p per share 
(last year 12p per share)

Total ordinary dividend, 22.5p per share
(last year 18.3p per share)

£m

140.1

217.9

358.0

The final ordinary dividend will be paid on 11 July 2008 to
shareholders whose names are on the Register of Members 
at the close of business on 30 May 2008.

Share capital and control 
(i) Structure 
The information in this section is given pursuant to section 992
of the Companies Act 2006 and is correct as at 29 March 2008.

The Company’s authorised share capital was £800,000,000
divided into 3,200,000,000 ordinary shares of 25p each 
and there were 1,586,478,423 ordinary shares in issue. 
The ordinary shares are listed on the London Stock Exchange
and can be held in certificated or uncertificated form.

The rights and obligations attaching to the Company’s 
ordinary shares, in addition to those conferred on their holders
by law, are set out in the Company’s Articles of Association, 
a copy of which can either be viewed on our website
marksandspencer.com/thecompany or obtained by writing
to the Company Secretary, or from Companies House in the
UK. The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive the
Company’s report and accounts, to attend and speak at
general meetings of the Company, to appoint proxies and to
exercise voting rights.

Changes to the Company’s Articles must be approved by
special resolution of the Company. New Articles are being
proposed at this year’s Annual General Meeting (AGM) which
include a number of changes, some of which may impact on
the rights, obligations, restrictions on transfer or voting rights
attaching to those shares. Explanatory notes relating to these
changes are included in the appendix to the Notice of Meeting
booklet which accompanies this report.

Interests in voting rights
Information provided to the Company pursuant to the Financial Services Authority’s (FSA) Disclosure and Transparency Rules
(DTRs) is published on a Regulatory Information Service and on the Company’s website. As at 6 May 2008, the Company had
been notified under DTR5 of the following significant holdings of voting rights in its shares:

Brandes Investment Partners, L.P (21.03.07)
Capital Research and Management Company (11.04.08)
Legal & General Group plc (26.03.08)

Ordinary shares

111,595,173
86,833,000
72,771,104

% of share 
capital

6.57%
5.47%
4.57%

Nature of holding

Indirect Interest
Indirect Interest
Direct Interest

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
36 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Group Directors’ report

continued

The Board is responsible for the management of the business
of the Company and may exercise all the powers of the
Company subject to the provisions of relevant statutes and 
the Company’s Memorandum and Articles of Association. 
For example, the Articles contain specific provisions and
restrictions regarding the Company’s power to borrow money;
provisions relating to the appointment of directors, subject to
subsequent shareholder approval; delegation of powers to a
director or secretary or committees of one or more persons;
and subject to certain exceptions, a director shall not vote 
on or be counted in a quorum in relation to any resolution 
of the Board in respect of any contract in which he/she has 
an interest which he/she knows is material. There are no
known arrangements under which financial rights are held 
by a person other than the holder of the shares. Shares to 
be acquired through the Company’s share plans rank equally
with the shares in issue and have no special rights. As far as
the Company is aware, there are no persons with significant
direct or indirect holdings of voting rights in the Company 
other than as set out in the paragraph entitled ‘Interests in
voting rights’ on page 35.

Significant agreements – change of control
There are a number of agreements to which the Company 
is party that take effect, alter or terminate upon a change 
of control of the Company following a takeover bid. Details 
of the significant agreements of this kind are as follows:

(cid:129) the £400m Medium Term Notes (MTNs) issued by the

Company to various institutions on 28 March 2007 under the
Group’s £3bn Euro Medium Term Note (EMTN) programme
contain an option such that, upon a change of control 
event, combined with a credit ratings downgrade to below 
sub-investment level, any holder of an MTN may require 
the Company to prepay the principal amount of that MTN;

(cid:129) the £250m puttable callable reset notes issued by the

Company to various institutions on 11 December 2007 under
the Group’s £3bn EMTN programme contain an option such
that, upon a change of control event, combined with a credit
ratings downgrade to below sub-investment level, any holder
of an MTN may require the Company to prepay the principal
amount of that MTN; 

(cid:129) the $500m US Notes issued by the Company to various
institutions on 6 December 2007 under section 144a of 
the US Securities Act contain an option such that, upon 
a change of control event, combined with a credit ratings
downgrade to below sub-investment level, any holder of
such a US Note may require the Company to prepay the
principal amount of that US Note; 

(cid:129) the $300m US Notes issued by the Company to various
institutions on 6 December 2007 under section 144a of 
the US Securities Act contain an option such that, upon 
a change of control event, combined with a credit ratings
downgrade to below sub-investment level, any holder of
such a US Note may require the Company to prepay the
principal amount of that US Note; 

(cid:129) the £1.2bn Credit Agreement between the Company and
various banks dated 13 August 2004 contains a provision
such that, upon a change of control event, unless new terms
are agreed within 60 days, the facilities under that agreement
will be cancelled with all outstanding amounts becoming
immediately payable with interest; and

(cid:129) the agreement between HSBC and the Company relating 
to M&S Money dated 9 November 2004 (as amended and
restated on 1 March 2005) contains a clause such that, upon
a change of control of the Company, any new owner would 
be obliged to give undertakings to HSBC in respect of the
continuation of the agreement, negotiate revised terms 
or terminate the agreement.

The Company does not have agreements with any director or
employee that would provide compensation for loss of office or
employment resulting from a takeover except that provisions of
the Company’s share schemes and plans may cause options
and awards granted to employees under such schemes and
plans to vest on a takeover.

(ii) Issue of new ordinary shares
During the period, 12,447,224 ordinary shares in the Company
were issued as follows:

(cid:129) 114,556 shares under the terms of the 1997 Executive

Share Option Scheme at prices between 358p and 557p;

(cid:129) 66,030 shares under the terms of the 2000 Executive 

Share Option Scheme at prices between 215p and 350p;

(cid:129) 2,054,623 shares under the terms of the 2002 Executive

Share Option Scheme at prices between 270p and 353p; and

(cid:129) 10,212,015 shares under the terms of the United Kingdom
Employees’ Save As You Earn Share Option Scheme at
prices between 156p and 559p.

(iii) Purchase of ordinary shares
The Company was authorised by shareholders, at the 
July 2007 AGM, to purchase in the market up to 170 million
shares, representing 10% of the Company’s issued share
capital, as permitted under the Company’s Articles. The
Company engages in share buy backs to create value for 
the shareholders, when cash flow permits and there is not 
an immediate alternative investment use for the funds. The
Company announced on 6 November 2007 that it would 
begin a share buy back programme to purchase up to 10% 
of the Company’s issued share capital. Since then and up 
to 19 May 2008, the date of this report, 127,017,902 of the
Company’s ordinary shares, with a nominal value of 25p each,
were bought back and cancelled, representing 7.5% of the
Company’s issued share capital at 10 July 2007, the date of
the 2007 AGM. An up-to-date summary of all transactions is
available on our website. This standard authority is renewable
annually and approval will be sought from shareholders at 
the 2008 AGM to renew for another year. It is the Company’s
present intention to cancel any shares it buys back, rather 
than hold them in treasury.

Board of directors
The membership of the Board and biographical details of 
the directors are given on page 32 and are incorporated 
into this report by reference.

Martha Lane Fox was appointed to the Board as a 
non-executive director on 1 June 2007. Jack Keenan 
retired from the Board on 10 July 2007.

On 10 March 2008 the Company announced a number of
Board and senior management changes. Lord Burns will retire
as Chairman with effect from 1 June 2008. Sir Stuart Rose will
be appointed Executive Chairman from 1 June 2008. 

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 37

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Kate Bostock was appointed to the Board as an Executive
Director of Clothing and Steven Esom was appointed to 
the Board as Executive Director of Food on 10 March 2008.
Details of these changes are set out on page 39 of the
Corporate governance statement and are incorporated into 
this report by reference.

Directors’ indemnities
The Company maintains directors’ and officers’ liability
insurance which gives appropriate cover for any legal action
brought against its directors. The Company has also granted
indemnities to each of its directors and the secretary to 
the extent permitted by law. Qualifying third party indemnity
provisions (as defined by section 234 of the Companies Act
2006) were in force during the year ended 29 March 2008 
and remain in force, in relation to certain losses and liabilities
which the directors (or secretary) may incur to third parties in
the course of acting as directors (or secretary) or employees 
of the Company or of any associated company. 

Directors’ interests 
The beneficial and non-beneficial interests of the directors 
and connected persons in the shares of the Company are
shown on page 52. Options granted under the Save As 
You Earn (SAYE) scheme and Executive Share Option
Schemes are shown on pages 54 and 55. Further information
regarding employee share schemes is given in note 12 to the
financial statements.

Related party transactions
Internal controls are in place to ensure that related party
transactions involving directors, or their connected parties, 
are conducted on an arm’s length basis.

Directors’ responsibilities
The directors are obliged under company law to prepare financial
statements for each financial year and to present them annually
to the Company’s members in the Annual General Meeting.

The financial statements, of which the form and content 
is prescribed by the Companies Act 1985 and applicable
accounting standards, must give a true and fair view of the
state of affairs of the Company and the Group at the end 
of the financial year, and of the profit for that period.

The directors are also responsible for the adoption of suitable
accounting policies and their consistent use in the financial
statements, supported where necessary by reasonable and
prudent judgements.

The directors confirm that the above requirements have been
complied with in the financial statements.

In addition, the directors are responsible for maintaining
adequate accounting records and sufficient internal controls 
to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent and
detect fraud or any other irregularities, as described more 
fully in the Corporate governance statement on page 46.

Directors’ responsibility statement pursuant to DTR4
The directors confirm that, to the best of their knowledge:

(a) the Group and Company financial statements in this report,
which have been prepared in accordance with International
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted by the EU,
IFRIC interpretations and those parts of the Companies Act
1985 applicable to companies reporting under IFRS, give a
true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position 
and profit of the Group taken as a whole; and

(b) the management report contained in this report includes 
a fair review of the development and performance of the
business and the position of the Company and the Group
taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal
risks and uncertainties that they face. 

Audit information
Each director confirms that, so far as he/she is aware, 
there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s
auditors are unaware and that each director has taken all 
the steps that he/she ought to have taken as a director to
make himself/herself aware of any relevant audit information
and to establish that the Company’s auditors are aware of 
that information.

Employee involvement
We have maintained our commitment to employee involvement
throughout the business.

Employees are kept well informed of the performance 
and objectives of the Group through personal briefings, 
regular meetings, email and Chief Executive broadcasts 
at key points in the year to all head office employees 
and store management. These are supplemented by our
employee publications including Your M&S magazine and 
DVD presentations. More than 3,500 employees elected 
onto Business Involvement Groups across every store and
head office location represent their colleagues in two-way
communication and consultation with the Company. 

They have continued to play a key role in a wide variety 
of business changes.

The thirteenth meeting of the European Council took 
place last July. This Council provides an additional forum for
informing, consulting and involving employee representatives
from the countries in the European Community. 

Directors and senior management regularly visit stores 
and discuss with employees matters of current interest 
and concern to the business. 

Share schemes are a long-established part of our total 
reward package, encouraging and supporting employee 
share ownership. In particular, over 25,000 employees
currently participate in Sharesave, the Company’s all 
employee Save As You Earn scheme. Full details of all
schemes are given on pages 49 and 50.

We maintain contact with retired staff through communications
from the Company and the Pension Trust. Member-nominated
trustees have been elected to the Pension Trust Board,
including employees and pensioners. We continue to produce
a regular Pensions Update newsletter for members of our final
salary pension scheme and our M&S Retirement Plan.

Equal opportunities
The Group is committed to an active Equal Opportunities
Policy from recruitment and selection, through training 
and development, appraisal and promotion, to retirement.

It is our policy to promote an environment free from
discrimination, harassment and victimisation, where 
everyone will receive equal treatment regardless of gender,
colour, ethnic or national origin, disability, age, marital 
status, sexual orientation or religion. All decisions relating 
to employment practices will be objective, free from bias 
and based solely upon work criteria and individual merit.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
38 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Group Directors’ report

continued

Political donations 
It is our policy not to make donations for political purposes 
in the UK, to EU political parties or to incur EU political
expenditure. Accordingly, the Company and its subsidiaries 
did not give any money for political purposes in the UK nor 
did they make any donations to EU political organisations 
or incur any EU political expenditure during the year. 

Under the provisions of the Political Parties, Elections and
Referendums Act 2000, shareholder authority is required for
political donations to be made or political expenditure to be
incurred by the Company or any of its subsidiaries in the EU
and disclose any such payments in the Annual report. The
legislation gives a wide definition of what constitutes political
donations and political expenditure, including sponsorship,
subscriptions, payment of expenses, paid leave for employees
fulfilling public duties and support for bodies representing the
business community in policy review or reform. 

At the 2006 AGM shareholders gave a limited authority
(£100,000) to the Company and each of the six principal
employing companies to make political donations or to incur
political expenditure in the EU (which would not ordinarily be
regarded as political donations) as a precautionary measure, 
to allow the Company to continue supporting the community
and such organisations without inadvertently breaching the
legislation. This authority will expire in 2010.

Going concern
After making enquiries, the directors have a reasonable
expectation that the Company and Group has adequate
resources to continue in operational existence for the
foreseeable future. For this reason, they have adopted the
going concern basis in preparing the financial statements.

Auditors
Resolutions to reappoint PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 
as auditors of the Company and to authorise the Audit
Committee to determine their remuneration will be proposed 
at the 2008 AGM.

Annual general meeting
The AGM of Marks and Spencer Group plc will be held at 
the Royal Festival Hall, London on 9 July 2008. The Notice 
is given, together with explanatory notes, in the booklet which
accompanies this report.

By order of the Board
Graham Oakley, Group Secretary
London 
19 May 2008

The Group is responsive to the needs of its employees,
customers and the community at large and we are an
organisation that endeavours to use everyone’s talents 
and abilities to the full.

Employees with disabilities
It is our policy that people with disabilities should have full 
and fair consideration for all vacancies. During the year, we
continued to demonstrate our commitment to interviewing
those people with disabilities who fulfil the minimum criteria,
and endeavouring to retain employees in the workforce if they
become disabled during employment. We will actively retrain
and adjust their environment where possible to allow them to
maximise their potential.

We continue to work with external organisations to provide
workplace opportunities through our innovative Marks & Start
scheme and by working closely with jobCentrePlus.

Creditor payment policy
For all trade creditors, it is the Group’s policy to:

(cid:129) agree the terms of payment at the start of business with 

that supplier;

(cid:129) ensure that suppliers are aware of the terms of payment; and

(cid:129) pay in accordance with its contractual and other legal

obligations.

The main trading company, Marks and Spencer plc, has a
policy concerning the payment of trade creditors as follows:

(cid:129) general merchandise payments are received between 

16 and 23 days after the stock was delivered;

(cid:129) food payments are received between 18 and 25 days 

after the stock was delivered; and

(cid:129) distribution suppliers are paid monthly, for costs incurred 
in that month, based on estimates, and payments are
adjusted quarterly to reflect any variations to estimate.

Trade creditor days for Marks and Spencer plc for the year
ended 29 March 2008 were 15.3 days, or 10.2 working 
days (last year 14.7 days, or 9.8 working days), based on 
the ratio of Company trade creditors at the end of the year 
to the amounts invoiced during the year by trade creditors. 

Market value of properties
The last formal valuation of the Group’s properties was carried
out in September 2006. Taking into account movements in 
the Group’s property portfolio since that date, the directors are
of the opinion that the market value of the Group’s properties,
at 29 March 2008 exceeded their net book value (including
prepayments in respect of leasehold land) of the fixed asset
and leasehold properties by approximately £1.0bn.

Charitable donations
During the year, the Group made charitable donations 
to support the community of £15m (last year £13.9m). 
These principally consisted of cash donations of £5.4m (last
year £3.8m) which includes our ‘Marks & Start’ community
programme, Breakthrough Breast Cancer, Save The Children,
World Wildlife Fund, and local community donations, £1.9m
(last year £3m) of employee time, principally on Marks & Start
and school work experience programmes, and stock
donations of £7.5m (last year £6.6m) to a variety of charities
including Shelter, FareShare and The Birth Defects Foundation.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 39

Corporate governance statement

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

The Board is committed to achieving success for the Company
by building a sustainable business for the long term, generating
shareholder value through consistent profitable growth whilst
making sure that our customers can always trust us to do the
right thing. This statement explains our governance policies
and practices and provides insight into how the Board and
management run the business for the benefit of shareholders.
The governance rules which apply to all UK companies listed
on the London Stock Exchange are found in the Combined
Code on Corporate Governance which was updated by the
Financial Reporting Council in June 2006 (the ‘Code’). 
A detailed account of how the Company has applied the
Code’s principles and how we comply with its provisions 
can be found on our website at
marksandspencer.com/thecompany

The Board

The Board’s role is to:

(cid:129) provide entrepreneurial leadership of the Company 
within a framework of prudent and effective controls
which enables risk to be assessed and managed;

(cid:129) set the Company’s strategic aims, ensuring that the

necessary financial and human resources are in place 
for the Company to meet its objectives and review
management performance; and

(cid:129) set the Company’s values and standards and ensure 
that its obligations to its shareholders and others are
understood and met.

All directors are individually briefed on appointment, on the
duties they owe as directors to the Company. During the year,
the directors have been briefed on their new statutory duties 
as set out in the Companies Act 2006, which came into effect
on 1 October 2007. The central duty is the duty to act in good
faith and in a way most likely to promote the success of the
Company for the benefit of its members as a whole. In fulfilling
this duty, directors should have regard (amongst other matters)
to the likely consequences of any decision in the long term; 
the interests of employees; the need to foster business
relationships with suppliers, customers and others; the impact
of operations on the community and the environment; the
desirability of maintaining a reputation for high standards 
of business conduct; and the need to act fairly between
members of the Company.

The non-executive directors play a key governance role 
in protecting shareholders’ interests. They are independent 
and bring an external dimension to the Board, whilst
complementing the skills and experience of the executive
directors through their range of knowledge, experience and
insight from other sectors.

In January 2007 we announced Plan A, our business wide 
‘eco plan’ setting out our ambitions to change the way we
operate over the next five years. We are committed to our
principles of Quality, Value, Service, Innovation and Trust. 
Trust is earned from others as a result of our commitment to
long-held values and the way we behave. Our Code of Ethics
is available on our website. It outlines the behaviours that 
M&S expects from its employees, whether they are dealing
with our customers, suppliers, shareholders or colleagues. 
This includes acting in a professional manner with honesty 
and integrity at all times and following Company policies and

procedures. It also sets out guidelines on the environment,
fraud and financial reporting, the management of conflicts 
of interest and how to raise concerns about possible
improprieties in financial reporting or other matters. Senior
managers sign their acceptance of the Code of Ethics each
year and ensure it is applied in their areas of responsibility.

New Board structure
On 10 March 2008 we announced Board and senior
management changes. We stated that Lord Burns would stand
down as Chairman from 1 June 2008, when Sir Stuart Rose
would be appointed Executive Chairman.

On 3 April 2008 Lord Burns wrote to shareholders setting 
out the detailed reasons behind the Board’s decisions. A copy 
of this letter is available on our website. The Board has taken 
this decision, cognisant of its prime objective to ensure the
Company’s ongoing commercial success, and has put in 
place balancing controls to mitigate the governance concerns:

(cid:129) limited period of appointment of combined Chairman 

and Chief Executive until July 2011;

(cid:129) appointment of Sir David Michels as Deputy Chairman;

(cid:129) clear specification of duties of Executive Chairman 
and Deputy Chairman to ensure proper division of
responsibilities and balance of power;

(cid:129) appointment of two new executive directors and

increased responsibility for the Group Finance and
Operations Director;

(cid:129) recruitment of an additional non-executive director to

ensure a majority of independent directors on the Board.
Following that appointment, the Board will consider the
appointment of a further non-executive; and

(cid:129) annual voting by shareholders for Sir Stuart Rose’s

reappointment as a director starting at the 2008 AGM.

The Board unanimously believes that the overall arrangements
represent a sensible way forward and provide a sound
transitional governance structure leading to the appointment 
of a new Chairman and separate Chief Executive by summer
2011. The new structure will ensure continuity of leadership,
strengthen the Board and streamline the organisation. This 
will focus everyone on business performance during a period
of significant trading uncertainty and it addresses investor
concerns over succession.

Consultation with shareholders
The Code states that: “If exceptionally a Board decides that 
a Chief Executive should become Chairman, the Board should
consult major shareholders in advance and should set out its
reasons to shareholders at the time of the appointment and 
in the next annual report”.

In the period leading up to the announcement on 10 March
2008 of the Board and senior management changes, the 
Board considered how best to communicate with shareholders.
The changes proposed as part of the new governance and
management structure were wide-ranging and not only included
the appointment of the Executive Chairman and Deputy
Chairman but two new Board appointments, the extension 
of the Finance Director’s role and a large number of senior
management appointments, as well as news of the departures
of several members of the senior management team.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
40 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Corporate governance statement

continued

In light of these proposed changes and their sensitivities 
the Board was concerned about the risk of leaks and did 
not consult major shareholders in advance. The Board was
unanimous and clear that the proposed changes, taken as 
a whole, were in the interests of shareholders, customers 
and employees. The Board was also clear that whatever
consultation was undertaken in advance of an announcement,
its deliberations would nonetheless be subject to comment
and scrutiny. The Board also knew that it would, rightly, be
obliged under the Code to explain why it was proposing to
combine the Chairman and Chief Executive roles and to
answer questions from any shareholders with concerns.

Since the announcement, Lord Burns has consulted with a
number of principal investors and shareholder representative
bodies and he and Sir David Michels have met with those 
who had requested a meeting. A letter was also sent to all
shareholders on 3 April 2008 setting out the detailed reasons
behind the Board’s decisions.

Division of responsibilities
The Board has reviewed and agreed a clear specification 
of duties under the new Board structure to ensure a proper
division of responsibilities and balance of power. The Deputy
Chairman will have joint responsibility with the Executive
Chairman, for the agenda and the overall Board structure and
composition. He will chair the Nomination Committee, provide

leadership for the non-executive directors, be responsible 
for monitoring Board effectiveness and lead on corporate
governance issues. Sir David Michels has committed to spend
sufficient and significant time in his role as Deputy Chairman.
He is resigning from the Board of The British Land Company
PLC and resigned from RAB Capital PLC on 18 April 2008 in
order to ensure that he can fulfil his commitments.

In addition, the non-executive directors will meet independently
at least twice a year to keep the governance structure under
review to ensure appropriate safeguards are in place to protect
shareholder interests.

Board balance and independence
On 29 March 2008 the Board comprised 11 directors: 
the Chairman, Chief Executive, four executive directors and 
five non-executive directors. On 1 June 2008 the Board will
comprise 10 directors: the Executive Chairman, non-executive
Deputy Chairman, four executive directors and four further
non-executive directors. A full list of the directors, with details
of their biographies and committee membership, is given on
page 32.

The Board concludes that each non-executive director is
independent in character and judgement and will keep under
review whether there are relationships or circumstances which
are likely to affect, or could appear to affect, independence.

The principal roles of the Executive Chairman, Deputy
Chairman and non-executive directors are set out below:

Executive Chairman

(cid:129) to ensure the Board achieves its full potential to build 
a sustainable business for the long term, generating
shareholder value through consistent, profitable growth
whilst making sure that our customers always trust us 
to do the right thing; and

(cid:129) to act within delegated authority from the Board for 
all aspects of the management of the Group, which
includes developing appropriate business strategies 
for Board approval and achieving timely and effective
implementation.

During the period of combined Chairman and Chief
Executive: to keep the Deputy Chairman regularly informed
on all matters that may be of importance to the Group,
including its current performance and progress; and to
monitor performance of the executive directors in their
increased responsibilities, whilst focusing on the strategic
growth areas of the business.

Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director

(cid:129) to lead on all governance issues including conducting 
the annual review of Board effectiveness and ensuring
that the performance of individual directors is kept under
review; and

(cid:129) to provide a communication channel between the

Chairman and non-executive directors and, when required,
principal shareholders including representative bodies.

During the period of combined Chairman and Chief Executive:
to monitor the effectiveness of the role of Executive
Chairman; independently to lead the succession process 
for the appointment of a Chief Executive by 2011; and to
maintain contact with principal investors and representative
bodies on a regular basis, keeping the Board informed.

Non-Executive Directors

(cid:129) to bring an independent and external dimension to the

Board’s activities and play their part in relation to strategy,
performance, risk and people; and

(cid:129) within the spirit of partnership and mutual respect on 
the unitary board, to support, constructively challenge
and monitor the executive team.

During the period of combined Chairman and Chief
Executive: to keep the governance structure under review 
to ensure appropriate safeguards are in place to protect
shareholder interests.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 41

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Information and professional development
The Chairman ensures that the directors receive accurate,
timely and clear information. They receive regular updates 
on business performance against the annual operating plan
and investment decisions, together with business reports and
presentations from senior management at Board meetings.
Directors are encouraged to update their skills, knowledge 
and familiarity with the Group through their initial induction, 
ongoing participation at Board and Committee meetings,
meeting employees at store locations and elsewhere and are
kept up-to-date on the views of customers and shareholders.
The Board is regularly updated on governance and 
regulatory matters.

Graham Oakley as Group Secretary acts as a sounding 
board to the Chairman and individual directors. He supports
the Chairman in ensuring the Board functions effectively 
and fulfils its role. He is secretary of the Audit, Remuneration
and Nomination Committees and also heads the Corporate
Governance Group, which supports the Board and its
committees, as well as providing advice on a range of issues 
to commercial colleagues. From 1 June 2008 the Group
Secretary will have an additional reporting line to the Deputy
Chairman to assist him in fulfilling his governance duties.

There is an established procedure whereby the Board or 
any of its Committees may take independent professional
advice when appropriate. Any individual director, wishing 
to do so in the furtherance of their duties, may also take
independent professional advice through the secretary at 
the Company’s expense. Directors are granted an indemnity
from the Company in respect of liabilities incurred as a result 
of their office. In respect of those matters for which they
cannot be indemnified, the Company maintains appropriate
liability insurance for the benefit of directors.

Board performance
The performance of the Board is a vital component of the
Group’s success and the Board is keen to ensure that the
annual review of its performance builds on the previous year’s
results to ensure a continuous process. In September 2007
the Board approved an action plan based on the key themes
from the 2006/07 review of process, people, strategy and
performance measures. The action plan also referred to 
the new statutory directors’ duties, to address these as 
an integral part of Board performance. The Board agreed 
to conduct the 2007/08 review ‘in house’ and that it be led 
by Lord Burns. In January 2008 each director completed a
questionnaire to rate collective performance over some 20
questions with free text boxes for comments. The Chairman
then reviewed an unattributed executive summary, highlighting
key outcomes which he has subsequently discussed with
individual directors.

Some of the outcomes achieved in 2007/08 following the
2006/07 review:

(cid:129) a greater focus on the long-term growth prospects of the

business leading to the announcement in November 2007 
of our priorities for the next five years. Whilst continuing to
invest in our core business we have ambitious plans for
our UK property portfolio, M&S Direct and International
businesses and Plan A; 

(cid:129) regular reviews of the bench strength of senior

management and future skills and composition of the
Board, leading to the new governance and management
structures announced on 10 March 2008. Succession
planning will continue to be a priority and from 1 June
2008 Sir David Michels, Deputy Chairman, will chair the
Nomination Committee; and

(cid:129) introduction of an online Board portal to provide a more
secure, efficient and flexible method of delivering Board
papers and easy access to information for induction 
and ongoing development.

From 1 June 2008 Sir David Michels as Deputy Chairman
will lead the Board’s review of its performance. He will also
hold meetings with the non-executive directors, without 
the executive directors present, to monitor and reflect on
the effectiveness of the new governance structure and to
appraise the performance of the Executive Chairman.

Individual performance
The performance of the executive directors was reviewed
individually by the Chief Executive against set objectives.
Remuneration is directly linked to these reviews and
determined by the Remuneration Committee. Similarly, 
the Chief Executive’s performance was reviewed by the
Chairman. The Senior Independent Director reviewed the
Chairman’s performance against a set of previously agreed
objectives. The performance of the non-executive directors
was reviewed individually by the Chairman. This year’s
questionnaire also invited each director to comment on 
the individual performances of themselves, other directors 
and the Chairman.

Under the new Board structure from 1 June 2008 the Deputy
Chairman will review the performance of the Executive Chairman,
taking into account the views of the non-executive directors.

Committee performance
The process for reviewing the effectiveness of the Committees
in 2007/08 has been to combine ongoing reviews with a
simple questionnaire led by each of the respective chairmen.
The Audit and Remuneration Committees undertook a review
looking at their methods of operation and processes and
combined this with the use of questionnaires which were
conducted in March 2008. An executive summary was
produced for the Chairman of each Committee which they
discussed with their respective Committee members.

Succession planning and senior leadership development 
During the year successional planning reviews were held 
by the Board and the Nomination Committee resulting in 
key appointments to the Board and senior management. 
We made important organisational changes, promoting
existing talent and bringing in new people, to ensure we 
have the right skills in key areas of focus over the next three
years. Senior leadership development remains a priority.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
42 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Corporate governance statement

continued

Board committees

The principal Board committees are the Audit,
Remuneration and Nomination Committees. The written
terms of reference of each committee can be found on 
our website.

Audit Committee
The Audit Committee comprises four independent, 
non-executive directors: Jeremy Darroch (Chairman), 
Martha Lane Fox, Steven Holliday and Sir David Michels.
Martha joined the Board and became a member of the
Committee on 1 June 2007 to replace Jack Keenan who
retired on 10 July 2007.

The Audit Committee assists the Board in fulfilling 
its oversight responsibilities and its primary role is to 
monitor the integrity of the financial statements and 
other information to shareholders; to review the systems 
of internal control and risk management; to maintain 
an appropriate relationship with the Company’s external
auditors; and to review the effectiveness and objectivity 
of the audit process.

It met four times during the year reviewing a number of 
internal audits relating to key business processes and the
principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group. The
Committee received updates on the governance process
around business change initiatives and reviewed the Code of
Ethics and whistleblowing returns. Private meetings have been
held separately with the external auditors and internal audit.

The Board has satisfied itself that at least one member 
of the Audit Committee has recent and relevant financial
experience and is confident that the collective experience 
of the members enables them to act as an effective Audit
Committee. The Committee also has access to the financial
expertise of the Group and its auditors and can seek further
professional advice at the Company’s expense, if required.

The Board has appointed a new Head of Internal Audit and
Risk, Claire Combes, who joined the Company on 6 May
2008. Following the departure on 31 July 2007 of the previous
Head of Internal Audit, John Federer, the function has been 
led by the two Audit Managers who have had direct access 
to the Audit Committee Chairman.

The Committee keeps under review the independence and
objectivity of the external auditors, PricewaterhouseCoopers
LLP (‘PwC’), including the review of any audit fee proposals
and non-audit fees. An engagement and fee approvals process
is in place which requires prior approval from the Committee
for certain engagements. On occasions, the nature of non-
audit advice may make it more timely and cost-effective to
select PwC, who already have a good understanding of the
Group. PwC may also be appointed for consultancy work, 
but only after rigorous checks, including competitive tender, 
to confirm they are the best provider. PwC is also subject 
to professional standards which safeguard the integrity 
of the auditing role performed on behalf of shareholders. 
Arrangements have been made, in conjunction with PwC, for
audit partner rotation in accordance with the recommendations
of the Auditing Practices Board. The lead audit engagement
partner, Ranjan Sriskandan, has been in place since 2003/04
and is being succeeded by Stuart Watson with effect from

2008/09. As authorised by shareholders at the AGM on 10 July
2007, the Audit Committee determines the level of remuneration
for the external auditors on behalf of the Board. Details of this
year’s fees are given in note 4 to the financial statements.

Remuneration Committee
The Remuneration Committee comprises four independent
non-executive directors: Louise Patten (Chairman), 
Martha Lane Fox, Steven Holliday, and Sir David Michels.
Martha joined the Board and became a member of the
Committee on 1 June 2007 to replace Jack Keenan who
retired on 10 July 2007. It met five times during the year. 

The Remuneration Committee’s primary role is to
recommend to the Board the remuneration strategy 
and framework, giving due regard to the financial and
commercial health of the Company and to ensure that
executive directors and senior management are fairly
rewarded for their individual contributions to the 
Company’s overall performance. 

The remuneration of the non-executive directors is determined
by the Chairman and the executive directors. The Remuneration
report is set out on pages 48 to 55 as required by the Directors’
Remuneration Report Regulations 2002.

Nomination Committee
The Nomination Committee comprises Lord Burns (Chairman),
Sir Stuart Rose and all five independent non-executive
directors: Jeremy Darroch, Martha Lane Fox, Steven Holliday, 
Sir David Michels and Louise Patten. Martha joined the Board
and became a member of the Committee on 1 June 2007 
to replace Jack Keenan who retired on 10 July 2007. From 
1 June 2008 Sir David Michels, Deputy Chairman, will chair the
Committee to replace Lord Burns who will retire on that date.

The Nomination Committee’s primary role is to ensure that
appropriate procedures are in place for the nomination,
selection, training and evaluation of directors and for
successional plans. It reviews the Company’s Board
structure, size, composition and successional needs,
thereby keeping under consideration the balance of
membership and the required blend of skills, knowledge
and experience of the Board. Appointments are made 
on merit and against objective criteria to ensure that 
the Board maintains a balance of skills and experience.

It met twice formally during the year and succession 
planning sessions were held by the Board and the 
Nomination Committee to consider Board and senior
management changes. Under the Company’s Articles of
Association, all directors seek election at their first Annual
General Meeting following appointment and all directors 
are required to offer themselves for re-election at least every
three years. Under the new Board structure from 1 June 2008
we have announced that Sir Stuart Rose will retire and seek 
re-election by shareholders on an annual basis, commencing 
in 2008, rather than on the usual three-year cycle.

On 10 March 2008 we announced the appointment 
with immediate effect of two new executive directors, 
Kate Bostock and Steven Esom, as well as changes to 
the senior management team. The Board was keen to 
ensure a proper mix of top talent, combining new recruits 
and existing employees. 

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 43

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Consideration was given when recruiting below Board level as to whether further progression on the Board was possible, as
demonstrated by the promotion of two new executive directors and the increased responsibility given to Ian Dyson as Group
Finance and Operations Director.

On 22 May 2007 we announced the appointment of a new non-executive director, Martha Lane Fox, with effect from 1 June 2007.
This followed a search by an external search consultancy commissioned by the Nomination Committee. The candidates were
shortlisted by the Chairman and the Chief Executive and the preferred candidate then seen by a wider group of directors. A search
led by Sir David Michels on behalf of the Committee is currently under way for a new non-executive director which is being conducted
through an external search consultancy.

Attendance
The following table sets out the number of meetings of the Board and its governance committees during the year and individual
attendance by Board and committee members at those meetings. Directors who were unable to attend Board or committee
meetings reviewed the relevant papers and provided comments prior to the meeting to the Chairman, or Committee Chairman, 
as appropriate.

Name of Director

Lord Burns, Chairman
Sir Stuart Rose, Chief Executive

Executive Directors
Kate Bostock (appointed 10 March 2008)
Ian Dyson
Steven Esom (appointed 10 March 2008)
Steven Sharp

Non-Executive Directors
Jeremy Darroch
Martha Lane Fox (appointed 1 June 2007)1
Steven Holliday2
Jack Keenan (retired 11 July 2007)
Sir David Michels3
Louise Patten

A = Maximum number of meetings the director could have attended.

B = Number of meetings the director actually attended.

Group
Board
B

Audit
Committee
B
A

Remuneration
Committee
B
A

Nomination
Committee
B
A

9
9

1
9
1
9

9
6
8
3
6
9

–
–

–
–
–
–

4
3
4
1
4
–

–
–

–
–
–
–

4
2
3
1
2
–

–
–

–
–
–
–

–
3
5
2
5
5

–
–

–
–
–
–

–
2
4
2
3
5

2
2

–
–
–
–

2
1
2
1
2
2

2
2

–
–
–
–

2
–
2
1
2
2

A

9
9

1
9
1
9

9
7
9
3
9
9

1 Martha Lane Fox was unable to attend meetings of the Board on 8 February 2008, the Audit and Remuneration Committees on 27 February 2008 and the Nomination Committee

on 29 February 2008 as she was in hospital.

2 Steven Holliday was unable to attend meetings of the Audit and Remuneration Committees on 15 May 2007 and the Board on 5 November 2007 due to overseas commitments

with National Grid plc.

3 Sir David Michels was unable to attend meetings of the Board on 9 and 21 May and 5 November 2007; the Audit Committee on 15 May and 31 October 2007; and the

Remuneration Committee on 15 and 21 May 2007 due to overseas business commitments already planned prior to his appointment to the M&S Board.

Accountability and audit

The Group’s overriding corporate objective is to maximise long-term shareholder value whilst exceeding the expectations of 
our customers, employees and partners. In doing so, the directors recognise that creating value is the reward for taking and
accepting risk.

The Board has overall responsibility for the Group’s approach to assessing risk and systems of internal control, and for monitoring
their effectiveness in providing shareholders with a return that is consistent with a responsible assessment and mitigation of risks.
This includes reviewing financial, operational and compliance controls and risk management procedures. The role of executive
management is to implement the Board’s policies on risk and control, and to provide assurance on compliance with these policies.
Independent assurance is provided by internal audit, which operates across the Group, and the external auditors. All employees
are accountable for operating within these policies.

Because of the limitations that are inherent in any system of internal control, this system is designed to manage, rather than eliminate,
the risk of failure to achieve corporate objectives. Accordingly, it can only provide reasonable but not absolute assurance against
material misstatement or loss.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
44 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Corporate governance statement

continued

Risk assessment
Every six months the Board reviews the Group Risk Profile – the tool that drives risk assessment and action planning. 
This is supported by an ongoing process for identifying, evaluating and managing the significant risks faced by the Group. 
As an integral part of planning and review, managers from each business area and major projects:

(cid:129) identify the risks to their plans;

(cid:129) evaluate the risks using likelihood and impact; and

(cid:129) document the actions being taken to manage those risks.

This process has been in place for the year under review and up to the date of approval of the Annual report and accounts. 
It has been regularly reviewed by the Board and accords with the Internal Control Guidance for directors on the Code
produced by the Financial Reporting Council.

Principal risks and uncertainties
There are risks and uncertainties which could impact the Group’s long-term performance. The risk assessment process is
designed to identify, manage and mitigate business risk. The table below gives examples of activities across Group functions 
to mitigate against risks and uncertainties identified. The Board considers that these are the most significant risks to achieving
business goals. The risks listed do not comprise all those associated with Marks & Spencer and are not set out in any order 
of priority. Additional risks and uncertainties not presently known to management, or currently deemed to be less material, may
also have an adverse effect on the business.

Risk

Impact

Examples of mitigating activities 

PRODUCT: We aim to provide a wide choice of great value, high quality clothing, food and home products, which are all
sourced and made responsibly.

Clothing
We fail to maintain clothing
market share through 
growth of space and focus 
on product in the face of
increased competition in 
tougher trading conditions 

See pages 11 to 15 

Food
We fail to deliver profitable 
sales growth while 
maintaining an innovation 
gap over competitors

See pages 17 to 19

Adverse effect on 
financial results

Lost market share 
and customer loyalty

Adverse effect on 
financial results

Lost market share 
and customer loyalty

(cid:129) New and better product, exploiting areas of opportunity
(cid:129) Tracking of customer perceptions of product
(cid:129) A supply base that enables future growth with emphasis 

on best value and speed to market

(cid:129) New and better space offering to make clothing more 

accessible to our customers

(cid:129) Store specific cataloguing and effective stock management 
to put the right stock in the right stores for our customers

(cid:129) Plan A initiatives, eg ethical sourcing

(cid:129) Continual product and technical innovation to maintain

competitive advantage

(cid:129) Continued emphasis on fresh food credentials
(cid:129) Independent quality assessment of key food lines
(cid:129) Tracking of customer perceptions of product
(cid:129) A supply base that enables future growth and further 

strengthens our food credentials

(cid:129) Food more accessible to our customers through new 

owned and franchised stores

(cid:129) Plan A initiatives, eg differentiated raw materials

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 45

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Principal risks and uncertainties continued

Risk

Impact

Examples of mitigating activities 

PEOPLE: As we continue to grow our business and invest for the future, it’s important we keep strengthening our team 
at every level from shop floor through to management.

We fail to attract, develop 
and retain talent with the 
correct skills and capability 
for succession

See pages 6 and 20 and 21

Inability to develop and
execute business plans

Competitive 
disadvantage

(cid:129) New senior management structure in place
(cid:129) A focus on senior leadership development and succession
(cid:129) Competitive reward packages
(cid:129) Buying Academies in head office and coaches in stores
(cid:129) Graduate recruitment and development
(cid:129) Employee communication
(cid:129) Tracking of employee satisfaction surveys
(cid:129) Tracking of customer perceptions of service

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

M&S DIRECT: We are further developing our M&S Direct business as an important part of our commitment to becoming 
a multi-channel retailer.

We fail to deliver sales 
growth by failing to meet
customer expectations

See pages 26 and 27

Adverse effect on 
financial results

(cid:129) Capability to grow sales via new products and new customers
(cid:129) A focus on improved order fulfilment and customer service

Lost market share 
and customer loyalty

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

INTERNATIONAL: We have ambitious plans to grow our International business through expanding our franchise operation,
entering into partnerships and developing wholly-owned businesses in emerging economies.

We fail to grow our 
International business
successfully through franchise
operations, partnerships or
wholly-owned businesses

See pages 28 and 29

Adverse effect on 
financial results

(cid:129) A focus on appropriate resource required to integrate 

new ventures

(cid:129) New operational and financial processes in place to 

Damage to brand

support growth of International businesses

(cid:129) Strong relationships forged with key stakeholders

PLAN A: We launched our five-year ‘eco plan’ in January 2007 to address challenges across five areas: 
climate change, waste, sustainable raw materials, fair partner and health.

We fail to deliver, measure 
or communicate 
performance against our 
Plan A commitments

See pages 30 and 31

Lost stakeholder trust 
and confidence

(cid:129) Governance in place to achieve our commitments, 

including a new Director of Plan A

Damage to brand

(cid:129) Performance reporting further developed
(cid:129) Plan A integrated into day-to-day operation including 
Plan A Champions throughout head office and stores
(cid:129) Open dialogue with stakeholders developing our mutual

understanding of the challenges we face

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
46 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Corporate governance statement

continued

Internal control

The Board maintains full control and direction over appropriate
strategic, financial, organisational and compliance issues. 
It has delegated to executive management the
implementation of the systems of internal control within 
an established framework.

The Board has put in place an organisational structure 
with formally defined lines of responsibility and delegation 
of authority. There are also established procedures for
planning, capital expenditure, information and reporting
systems, and for monitoring the Group’s businesses and
their performance. 

These include:

Plans and policies
(cid:129) communication of the Group’s strategy, objectives 

and targets;

(cid:129) annual operating and capital plans and future projections;

(cid:129) operating policies and procedures;

(cid:129) clearly defined capital investment control guidelines;

(cid:129) review of treasury policies by the Board; and

(cid:129) review of social, environmental and ethical matters by 

the How we do business Committee.

Competent people
(cid:129) appointment of employees of the necessary calibre to 

fulfil their allotted responsibilities; and

(cid:129) clear roles and accountabilities with regular performance

reviews.

Monitor and control
(cid:129) review by operating divisions of their plans with the relevant
executive directors prior to submission to the Board for
approval, including identification and assessment of risks;

(cid:129) monthly comparison of operating divisions’ actual financial

performance against budget; and

(cid:129) regular consideration by the Board of year-end forecasts.

Regulatory update
(cid:129) reporting of accounting and legal developments; and

(cid:129) regular briefings on latest best practice corporate

governance to the Board.

Assurance
On behalf of the Board, the Audit Committee examines 
the effectiveness of the Group’s:

(cid:129) assessment of risk by reviewing evidence of risk

assessment activity and a report from internal audit 
on the process undertaken;

(cid:129) systems of internal control, primarily through approving 
the internal audit plan and reviewing its findings, reviews 
of the Annual and Interim financial statements and a review
of the nature, scope and reports of the external audit;

(cid:129) action plans taken, or to be taken, to remedy any
significant failings or weaknesses identified; and

(cid:129) action plans in place to manage significant risks.

The Audit Committee has completed its review of the
effectiveness of the Group’s systems of internal control 
during the year, which are in compliance with the Turnbull
Guidance 2005. It confirms the necessary action plans 
to remedy identified weaknesses in internal control are 
in place and have been throughout the year.

Internal audit’s work is focused on areas of priority as identified
by the Group Risk Profile and in accordance with an annual
audit plan approved each year by the Audit Committee and by
the Board. The Board receives a full report from internal audit
each year on the department’s work and findings and regular
interim updates on specific issues. The Audit Committee
monitors and assesses the role and effectiveness of the
internal audit function on behalf of the Board.

The external auditors are engaged to express an opinion on
the financial statements. They review and test the systems of
internal financial control and the data contained in the financial
statements to the extent necessary to express their audit
opinion. They discuss with management the reporting of
operational results and the financial position of the Group 
and present their findings to the Audit Committee.

Relations with shareholders

Communication
We are committed to ongoing engagement with
shareholders and have a well-established cycle of
communication based on the Group’s financial reporting
calendar. This includes our preliminary results in May,
Annual report in June, half year results in November 
and Interim management statements in January and July.
Our website provides up-to-date information including
simultaneous webcasts of our financial results and 
AGM presentations; regulatory announcements; Annual
reports; corporate governance and share price information
and answers to frequently asked questions. Following
shareholder approval in July 2007, the website is now 
our principal means of communicating with investors.

Institutional investors
Our investor relations department is the focal point for 
contact with our institutional investors and is in regular 
contact with them as well as with analysts and brokers 
during the year. Our Chairman, Chief Executive and Group
Finance and Operations Director play key roles in our
relationship with major shareholders and the presentations 
of full and half year results are attended by all the executive
directors. The Senior Independent Director is also available 
for shareholders as required. An investor relations summary 
is produced for each Board meeting and each year the Board
receives feedback from independent advisers on institutional
investor views of management and Company performance,
based on the results of their extensive survey. From 1 June
2008 the Deputy Chairman will maintain contact with principal
investors and representative bodies on a regular basis, keeping
the Board informed.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 47

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Private investors
Private investors own a high percentage of our shares
compared to most other large UK companies. The Board is
also interested to know their views and we make a special
effort to ensure communications and policies are appropriate
to their needs. They can contact us in writing, by email at
chairman@marks-and-spencer.com, or by telephone on 
0845 609 0810 for shareholder queries and 0845 302 1234
for customer queries.

In January 2008 we consulted with shareholders on electronic
communication – nearly 40,000 shareholders confirmed that
they wished to continue to receive hard copy documents, 
such as the Annual report. The remainder will be notified 
when the Annual report is available on our website. However,
all shareholders will continue to receive an AGM Notice of
Meeting, together with key financial and governance
information to enable them to vote.

Postage-paid topics cards are sent with the AGM Notice of
Meeting giving shareholders further opportunity to make their
views known to us. The three most frequently raised topics 
are addressed at the meeting and a summary of all comments
is given to the Board and directors of each business unit.

Our registrars, Equiniti, continue to enhance their services for
shareholders through their website at shareview.co.uk. This
offers a number of capabilities ranging from electing to receive
communications electronically to checking shareholdings and
dividend information online.

Many shareholders are also customers and each year we 
send them Spend and Save vouchers to use in our stores.
These are very popular, and in spring 2008 the offer was
extended to technology products and online shopping.

Annual General Meeting

The AGM is an important event in our corporate calendar
and is well attended by shareholders. Prior to the meeting
an exhibition is hosted by our senior retail and business
managers. The meeting commences with a business
presentation and then the Chairman, Chief Executive 
and other members of the Board answer questions raised
by shareholders. All directors are present, including the
Chairman of the Audit, Remuneration and Nomination
Committees. Shareholders are then invited to vote on the
resolutions contained in the Notice of Meeting, which is 
sent to them at least 20 working days beforehand. The
business presentation, voting results and a summary of 
the questions raised and answers given at the meeting 
are made available on our website.

Since 2004 voting at the meeting has been conducted by 
poll, using the electronic Votenow system, rather than on 
a show of hands. This gives a more democratic result as all
shares represented at the meeting and those lodged before
the meeting are included on a one share, one vote basis. 
Our registrars record all proxy votes received up to 48 hours
prior to our AGM and report the votes ‘For’, ‘Against’ or 
‘Vote withheld’ to the Chairman prior to the meeting. These
votes are included in the indicative poll result screened at 
the meeting. The final results are announced via the London 
Stock Exchange. In 2007 votes cast represented 53.5% of 
the ordinary share capital. All resolutions were passed with
votes ‘For’ resolutions ranging from 94.7% to 99.9%.

The next AGM will be held on Wednesday 9 July 2008 at the
Royal Festival Hall in London. In addition to routine resolutions,
shareholders will be asked to vote on the adoption of new
Articles of Association enabling us to benefit from the recent
changes brought about by the Companies Act 2006.

Compliance with the Combined Code
The Company complies with all the provisions of the Code 
with the following exceptions:

(cid:129) throughout the year ended 29 March 2008: the Board 
did not fully consult major shareholders in advance of 
our announcement on 10 March that our Chief Executive
would become Chairman from 1 June 2008 (A.2.2); and

(cid:129) from 1 June 2008: the role of Chairman and Chief

Executive will be exercised by the same individual (A.2.1)
and our Chief Executive will become Chairman (A.2.2).

Our reasons for departure from the Code are set out on
page 39.

Governance of the Group’s pension schemes
The Group operates a defined benefit scheme for all
employees with an appointment date prior to 1 April 2002 
and a defined contribution scheme open to those joining the
Company on or after 1 April 2002. More information is given 
in note 11 on pages 70 to 72.

The Board of the Pension Trust (‘Trustee Board’) manages 
the assets of the pension scheme which are held under trust
separately from those of the Group. The Board comprises 
Tony Watson as independent Chairman and Law Debenture
Trust as independent Trustee, together with five company
representatives and five member representatives.

The Trustee Board has reviewed the external auditor
appointment and appointed KPMG LLP in place of
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP with effect from February 2008.

In 2007, 89.6% of the proxy votes received were lodged
through the CREST system. We encourage private investors 
to register their vote before the meeting on the website at
sharevote.co.uk or by proxy card.

The Trustee Board has also carried out a review of its own
performance through questionnaire responses, one-to-one
discussions and collective agreement of areas of focus for
future development.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
48 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Remuneration report

This Remuneration report has been prepared on behalf of the
Board by the Remuneration Committee. In all its activities, the
Remuneration Committee has adopted the principles of good
governance as set out in the Combined Code and complies
with the Listing Rules of the Financial Services Authority, the
relevant schedules of the Companies Act and the Directors’
Remuneration Report Regulations 2002. These regulations
require the Company’s auditors to report on the ‘Audited
information’ in the report and to state that this section has
been properly prepared in accordance with the regulations. 
For this reason the report is divided into audited and unaudited
information. The Remuneration report is subject to shareholder
approval at the Annual General Meeting (AGM) on 9 July 2008.

Part 1: Unaudited information

Remuneration Committee
Who makes up the Remuneration Committee?
During 2007/08, the Committee comprised the following 
non-executive directors:

(cid:129) Louise Patten (Committee Chairman);

(cid:129) Martha Lane Fox (appointed on 1 June 2007);

(cid:129) Steven Holliday;

(cid:129) Sir David Michels; and

(cid:129) Jack Keenan (retired on 10 July 2007).

There were five meetings of the Committee during the year
under review and attendance at the meetings is detailed in 
the Corporate governance statement on page 43.

What is the remit of the Remuneration Committee?
The Committee has a remit covering the total remuneration 
of the executive directors of the Company, ensuring that the
most talented individuals are recruited, motivated to deliver
results and retained. The remit includes the following:

(cid:129) setting the senior remuneration strategy and framework 

for the top levels in the organisation;

(cid:129) ensuring that executive directors and senior managers 
are fairly rewarded for their individual performance and
contribution to the overall Company results;

(cid:129) reviewing and approving the remuneration and terms and
conditions of employment, including any terminations, for
executive directors and senior managers;

(cid:129) approving the design and targets for any annual incentive
schemes that include the executive directors and senior
managers;

(cid:129) agreeing the design and targets, where applicable, of all
share incentive plans for approval by shareholders; and

(cid:129) assessing the appropriateness and subsequently the
achievement of performance targets related to any 
share incentive plan.

The Committee takes into account the financial and
commercial health of the organisation when considering 
its approach to total remuneration. The Committee has
appointed Hewitt New Bridge Street as external advisors 
and invites internal support from the Company Chairman, 
Chief Executive, Group Secretary and Head of Senior
Remuneration. The Chairman and Chief Executive are 
not present for any discussions that relate directly to 
their own pay and benefit awards.

The Committee regularly reviews external data produced
through a number of surveys and bespoke benchmarking
data, including those published by Hewitt New Bridge Street,
Monks PwC, Towers Perrin and Watson Wyatt.

What is our remuneration framework?
The remuneration framework is simple and transparent, aligning
the reward of our executive directors and senior managers to
that of shareholders through a package highly geared towards
share incentive plans. The key components are:

(cid:129) salary and benefits;

(cid:129) Annual Bonus Scheme with a compulsory deferred share

element; and

(cid:129) Performance Share Plan (PSP).

The following charts show the balance of the package split
between pay at risk and fixed pay for on-target and maximum
performance. The Committee considers that the balance of
fixed and variable pay is appropriate to the external market.

Expected value of future annual remuneration package for executive directors

‘On-target’ performance

‘Maximum’ performance

4

3

2

1

1  Long-term incentives 46%
2  Salary 36%
3  Annual cash bonus 9%
4  Pension 9%

4

3

2

1

1  Long-term incentives 77%
2  Salary 10%
3  Annual cash bonus 10%
4  Pension 3%

The value placed on long-term incentives comprises the expected cash value to executives after three years, discounted back to its present value, of (i) bonus compulsorily 
deferred into shares and (ii) performance shares awarded under the Performance Share Plan.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 49

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

What are the pay and benefits received by the Board?
Chairman’s remuneration
The Chief Executive and other members of the Board determine
the Chairman’s salary. It reflects the level of commitment and
responsibility of the role. The fee has not increased since 
1 April 2007 (£450,000, as reported in last year’s Remuneration
report). The Chairman used approximately 25% of his net fees to
purchase shares in the Company up to and including March 2008.

The Chairman does not receive any other benefits except
employee product discount and the provision of a driver and
fleet vehicle.

Non-executive directors’ remuneration
The fees for non-executive directors are determined by 
the Chairman and executive directors and are paid in cash.
The levels are set to ensure the Company attracts individuals
with the necessary key skills and experience, recognising the
responsibility and time commitment required to complete 
the roles. The fees are not performance related and are not
pensionable. The fees comprise:

(cid:129) Basic annual fee:

(cid:129) Committee Chairman:

£55,000

£12,000*

(cid:129) Committee membership:

£6,000*

*Audit and Remuneration Committees only.

The emoluments table on page 53 reflects the fees paid 
during the year to each non-executive director. There are 
no other benefits except employee product discount.

Executive directors’ remuneration
Salaries and benefits are determined by the Remuneration
Committee. Basic salary is normally reviewed annually and any
increase awarded from 1 January. The Committee takes into
account a number of factors when reviewing these, including:

(cid:129) salary levels in comparably-sized FTSE 100 companies and

major retailers;

(cid:129) economic climate, market conditions and Company performance;

(cid:129) the level of pay awards in the rest of the business; and 

(cid:129) the role and responsibility of the individual directors.

As part of the annual review process, in January 2008, Sir
Stuart Rose, Ian Dyson and Steven Sharp received an increase
based on the above factors. No further increases have been
made to Sir Stuart Rose or Steven Sharp as a result of the
Board changes announced in March 2008. However, Ian
Dyson received an additional increase due to his expanded
responsibilities as Group Finance and Operations Director,
effective 10 March 2008. 

Kate Bostock and Steven Esom were both appointed to the
Board on 10 March 2008 and their current salaries are shown
together with all other executive directors in the Contract terms
table on page 51.

All the executive directors receive a 25% salary supplement 
in lieu of pension. Life assurance for executive directors who
are not in the Group’s Pension Schemes is provided through 
a separate policy and the value of this benefit is included in the
emoluments table, under Cash allowance and benefits on page 53.

Other benefits include a car or car allowance and driver and
are shown as part of the Cash allowance and benefits in the
emoluments table. Employee product discount is also received
but no specific value is placed on this all-employee benefit.

What are the current short-term and long-term incentive
schemes?
Annual Bonus Scheme – short-term incentive
Deferred Share Bonus Plan – long-term incentive
The Annual Bonus Scheme is reviewed each year and
designed to drive profitability and sales across the whole
organisation. The bonus potential for executive directors is
60% of salary for on-target performance and 250% of salary
for maximum performance. There is a compulsory deferral of
any bonus paid into shares for all senior managers. Further
details of the Deferred Share Bonus Plan can be found in 
note 12 to the financial statements on page 75.

Bonus scheme outcome of 2007/08
The targets set for 2007/08 were extremely challenging in 
a very difficult trading year for retailers. As a result, the very
stretching Corporate Profit Before Tax (PBT) target set at the
start of the year was not reached and therefore the executive
directors will not receive any bonus payment under this
scheme in 2008. Some senior managers and other employees
in Head Office and Retail will receive a bonus as they have
delivered local sales and profit targets in accordance with the
scheme rules.

Bonus scheme for 2008/09
The scheme remains in principle unchanged, with bonus
potentials still at 60% to 250% of salary for executive directors. 
Sir Stuart Rose, Ian Dyson and Steven Sharp will continue 
to be measured entirely on PBT targets. Kate Bostock and
Steven Esom will have bonus targets based 50% on PBT, with
the remaining 50% based on the achievement of profit and
sales in their respective business areas i.e. clothing and food.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

Performance Share Plan (PSP) – Long-term incentive 
This remains the primary long-term incentive for the ‘Top 100’
managers in the organisation. The plan normally allows for
awards up to 200% of salary, although up to 400% of salary
may be awarded to recognise exceptional performance or 
to address key retention issues.

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
50 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Remuneration report

continued

The performance targets are based on adjusted earnings 
per share (EPS) over a three-year period. EPS has shown
substantial growth over the time since the first grants were
made in July 2005. The first awards under this plan will 
vest in full in July 2008 as the Company has significantly
outperformed the challenging EPS targets that were set.

The Committee has reviewed the use of alternative
performance measures but considers that EPS is still the 
most effective measure of management performance, in
addition to being simple to understand and a transparent
measure of the Company’s success and shareholder return.

In 2007, four awards were made in excess of 200% of salary,
recognising exceptional performance. The Committee is likely
to award a very small number over 200% in 2008 to ensure
retention of key individuals.

The targets for 2008 awards have been set by the
Remuneration Committee following consultation with our 
10 largest investors, in addition to the ABI and RREV. The
principle of splitting the performance targets as adopted last
year will continue, with any element of an award over 200%
having a more stretching target. While the Company’s financial
performance continued to improve in 2007/08, and we are
confident in its long-term growth prospects, the short-term
economic outlook means that it is likely to be much more
difficult to achieve such high growth in the next few years. 
To this end, the Committee considers that the EPS ranges 
set for the 2008 awards are at least as challenging as the
previous EPS ranges were when they were set. Before any
2008 PSP awards in excess of 200% of salary vest, the
Committee will first satisfy itself that it is reasonable to approve
vesting of the awards, taking into account the Company’s
actual performance over the three-year performance period 
as well as EPS performance. The targets for all awards are:

Award

2005
2006
20072
20073
20082
20083

Average Annual EPS Growth
in excess of Inflation (RPI)

20% vesting

100% vesting

Adjusted EPS for
start of scheme1

8%
5%
4%
4%
3%
3%

15%
12%
10%
12%
6%
8%

22.2p 
31.4p
40.4p
40.4p
43.6p
43.6p

1 The base EPS figure for 2005 Awards was 23.5p, which was the adjusted EPS 
figure for 2004/05 on a proforma basis. The figure has been restated to 22.2p 
as the Group is now reporting under IFRS. Full details of EPS are described in 
note 8 to the financial statements on page 68 of the Annual report.

2 Awards up to 200% of salary.

3 Awards between 200% and 400% of salary.

Executive Share Option Scheme – Long-term incentive 
No grants have been awarded under the Executive Share
Option Scheme for the year under review. Whilst the Company
can still make awards under the scheme adopted at the 2005
AGM, there is no intention currently to use the scheme on 
a regular basis. The Committee will review the use of the
scheme and may grant awards if it is appropriate to do so. 

The final outstanding options will vest in full in June 2008
having achieved their EPS targets. The targets were based 
on adjusted EPS growth measured from the date of grant 
to the most recent financial year end as follows:

(cid:129) RPI plus an average of 3% per annum for 50% of each

grant; and

(cid:129) RPI plus an average of 4% per annum for the remaining 

50% of each grant.

Executive directors (excluding Steven Esom) have options
granted in 2004 under the 2002 scheme which met their
targets in 2007 and are exercisable in full as shown in the 
table on page 55.

All-Employee Share Schemes – Long-term incentive 
The Company has offered a Save As You Earn (SAYE) 
scheme called Sharesave since 1981. The scheme was
renewed by shareholders at the 2007 AGM for a further 
10 years. Executive directors can also participate in this
scheme. Details of participation by executive directors in
Sharesave are given in part 2 of this report.

The scheme is subject to HMRC rules which limit the maximum
amount saved to £250 per month. When the savings contract
is started, options are granted to acquire the number of shares
that the total savings will buy when the contract matures, at 
a discounted price set at the start of the scheme. Options
cannot normally be exercised until a minimum of three years
has elapsed.

What are the current service contracts and terms 
of employment?
Chairman
Lord Burns was appointed Chairman on 11 July 2006, and will
retire from the Board on 31 May 2008. His service agreement
requires 12 months’ notice from the Company. The agreement
contains a phased payment clause in line with executive
directors’ contracts.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 51

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Deputy Chairman
Sir David Michels is appointed Deputy Chairman with effect from 1 June 2008, and will continue in his role as Senior Independent
Director. On appointment to his new role, Sir David will have an agreement for service which requires six months’ notice by either
party (currently three months).

Non-executive directors
The non-executive directors have agreements with the Company for an initial three-year term, which are terminable on three
months’ notice by either party. Jack Keenan retired from the Board on 10 July 2007. Martha Lane Fox joined the Board on 
1 June 2007.

Executive directors
Sir Stuart Rose is appointed Executive Chairman with effect from 1 June 2008.

All senior managers, including executive directors, have service contracts. These contracts can be terminated by the Company
giving 12 months’ notice and by the employee giving six months’ notice. Sir Stuart Rose will remain on the same contract terms
when he is appointed Executive Chairman.

The Company retains the right to terminate the contract of any executive director summarily, in accordance with the terms of their
service agreement, on payment of a sum equivalent to the contractual notice entitlement of 12 months’ salary and specified benefits.
In the case of all current executive directors, the Company reserves the right on termination to make phased payments which are
paid in monthly instalments and subject to mitigation. Entitlement to participate in share schemes ceases on termination.

Contract terms and current annual salaries/fees for all members of the Board

Name

Chairman
Lord Burns
Chief Executive
Sir Stuart Rose

Executive directors
Kate Bostock
Ian Dyson
Steven Esom
Steven Sharp

Non-executive directors
Jeremy Darroch
Martha Lane Fox
Steven Holliday
Sir David Michels2
Louise Patten

Date of 
appointment

Notice period/
unexpired term

Basic salary/fee1
£000 

Committee
member fee
£000

Committee
chair/SID fee
£000

Current annual
salary/fee
£000

01/10/05 12 mths/6 mths

31/05/04 12 mths/6 mths

10/03/08 12 mths/6 mths
27/06/05 12 mths/6 mths
10/03/08 12 mths/6 mths
08/11/05 12 mths/6 mths

01/02/06
01/06/07
15/07/04
01/03/06
01/02/06

3 mths/3 mths
3 mths/3 mths
3 mths/3 mths
3 mths/3 mths
3 mths/3 mths

450

1,130

500
675
535
565

55
55
55
55
55

–

–

–
–
–
–

6
12
12
12
6

–

–

–
–
–
–

12
–
–
12
12

450

1,130

500
675
535
565

73
67
67
79
73

1 From 1 January 2008 for Sir Stuart Rose and Steven Sharp and 10 March 2008 for Kate Bostock, Ian Dyson and Steven Esom.

2 Sir David Michel’s basic fee will increase to £245,000 per annum on 1 June 2008 on his appointment to Deputy Chairman. This fee is inclusive of all committee memberships 

and his continuing role as Senior Independent Director. In addition, the notice period for his agreement will increase to six months for both parties.

What is the shareholding policy for executive directors?
The current shareholding policy for executive directors was introduced from 1 June 2002. All executive directors are required 
to hold a defined percentage of salary (200% for Chief Executive and 100% for all other executive directors) within a five-year
period from their date of appointment. The relevant salary is at date of appointment and the share market value is measured 
at the current date. Currently, all executive directors have either met, or are on target to meet, their required shareholding.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
52 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Remuneration report

continued

What are the directors’ interests in the Company?
The beneficial interests of the directors and connected persons in the shares of the Company are shown below. Options granted
under the SAYE scheme and the Executive Share Options Scheme and shares awarded under the Deferred Share Bonus Plan
and Performance Share Plan are shown in Part 2 of this report. Further information regarding employee share option schemes is
given in note 12 to the financial statements starting on page 75 of the Annual report.

There have been no other changes in the directors’ interests in shares or options granted by the Company and its subsidiaries
between the end of the financial year and 6 May 2008, one month prior to the Notice of the Annual General Meeting, other than
that noted below in respect of Lord Burns. No director had an interest in any of the Company’s subsidiaries at the beginning or end
of the year.

Name

Kate Bostock
Lord Burns1
Jeremy Darroch
Ian Dyson
Steven Esom
Martha Lane Fox
Steven Holliday
Sir David Michels
Louise Patten
Sir Stuart Rose
Steven Sharp

Ordinary shares as at 29 March 2008

Ordinary shares as at 1 April 2007 or at date of appointment

71,086
46,951
2,000
100,000
24,360
15,000
2,500
28,750
8,000
750,416
83,643

71,086
12,275
2,000
60,000
24,360
–
2,500
4,000
8,000
500,416
28,473

1 Lord Burns bought 3,856 shares on 1 April 2008 under the terms of his appointment, being the purchase of shares on a quarterly basis, using approximately 25% of his net 

fee from the Company, increasing his shareholding to 50,807 ordinary shares.

What are the executive directors’ external appointments?
The Company recognises that executive directors may be invited to become non-executive directors of other companies and 
that such appointments can broaden their knowledge and experience, to the benefit of M&S. The individual director retains the
fee. Below are the details of the executive directors’ external appointments:

Steven Esom
Sir Stuart Rose
Steven Sharp

Fee

£49,500
£55,000
£21,771

Company

Carphone Warehouse Group plc
Land Securities Group plc
Adnams plc

Performance graph
This graph illustrates the performance of the Company against the FTSE 100 over the past five years. The FTSE 100 has been
chosen as it is a recognised broad equity market index of which the Company has been a member throughout the period.

Performance, as required by legislation, is measured by Total Shareholder Return which is share price growth plus any dividends paid.

)

£

(

l

e
u
a
V

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

29 Mar 03

3 Apr 04

2 Apr 05

1 Apr 06

31 Mar 07

29 Mar 08

The above graph looks at the value, at 29 March 2008, of £100 invested in Marks and Spencer Group on 29 March 2003 compared with the value of £100 invested in the FTSE 100 Index over the same period. The other points 
plotted are the values at the intervening financial period-ends.

Marks and Spencer Group

FTSE 100 Index 

Source: Thomson Financial 

 
marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 53

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Part 2: Audited information

1 Directors’ emoluments

Chairman
Lord Burns
Chief Executive
Sir Stuart Rose1

Executive directors
Kate Bostock2
Ian Dyson3
Steven Esom4
Steven Sharp5

Non-executive directors
Jeremy Darroch
Martha Lane Fox
Steven Holliday
Sir David Michels7
Louise Patten
Directors retiring from the Board during the year
Jack Keenan8

Former directors9, 10

Total

Salary/
fee
£000

450

1,070

32
542
34
535

73
56
67
79
73

22

–

Cash
allowance
and benefits6
£000

3

305

7
156
10
166

–
–
–
–
–

–

–

Bonus
£000

–

–

–
–
250
–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–

Total
2008
£000

453

Total
2007
£000

339

1,375

2,302

39
698
294
701

73
56
67
79
73

22

262

–
1,151
–
1,165

61
–
60
68
58

68

251

3,033

647

250

4,192

5,523

1 Sir Stuart Rose received a salary increase from £1,050,000 to £1,130,000 effective from 1 January 2008. No bonus was earned in 2007/08.

2 Kate Bostock was promoted to the Board on 10 March 2008 at a salary of £500,000. No bonus was earned as an executive director in 2007/08 under the Annual Bonus
Scheme. £280,000 was earned in 2007/08, prior to her appointment to the Board, as part of a three-year cash bonus retention arrangement. If earned, the remaining two
instalments of this bonus arrangement will be paid in 2008/09 and 2009/10. Her Cash allowance and benefits include a 25% supplement on her salary earned above the
Pension Scheme cap as she was a member of the Retirement Plan during the year. In addition, the Company’s contribution into the Retirement Plan for 2007/08 for the 
period when she was an executive director was £1,153.

3 Ian Dyson received a salary increase from £525,000 to £565,000 effective from 1 January 2008. On 10 March 2008 his salary was increased to £675,000 to reflect his 

increased responsibilities as Group Finance and Operations Director. No bonus was earned in 2007/08.

4 Steven Esom was promoted to the Board on 10 March 2008 at a salary of £535,000. No bonus was earned as an executive director in 2007/08 under the Annual Bonus 
Scheme. A one-off bonus of £500,000 was earned in 2007/08 as part of his contractual agreement on recruitment, of which 50% is deferred into shares for three years. 
These shares will be granted on 9 June 2008.

5 Steven Sharp received a salary increase from £525,000 to £565,000 effective from 1 January 2008. No bonus was earned in 2007/08.

6 The elements included in the Cash allowance and benefits column of the table are described in detail in the Executive directors’ remuneration section on page 49 and have 

been audited.

7 In addition to the fees disclosed in the above table, the Company meets a due proportion of Sir David Michel’s general office and administration costs that relate to his 

Marks and Spencer Board duties. In the year under review, this amounted to £10,000. This arrangement will cease on his appointment to Deputy Chairman on 1 June 2008.

8 Jack Keenan retired from the Board on 10 July 2007.

9 The total for 2006/07 included the cost of supplying a driver and fleet vehicle to ex-Chairman Paul Myners. For 2007/08 the costs incurred by the Company were nil.

10 The £262,000 in 2008 (£251,000 in 2006) relates to payments to former directors under the Early Retirement Plan. Under this plan, the Remuneration Committee could, 

at its discretion, offer an unfunded Early Retirement Pension, separate from the Company pension, which was payable from the date of retirement to age 60. With effect from 
31 March 2000, the Early Retirement Plan was withdrawn but payments continue for awards made before this date.

The former directors are James Benfield who received £82,148 (£78,686 in 2007) payable until 22 April 2009, and Derek Hayes who received £76,422 (£73,202 in 2007) 
payable until 19 November 2008.

The pension scheme entitlement for Clinton Silver is supplemented by an additional unfunded pension paid by the Company which, for 2008, was £103,233 (£98,873 in 2007).

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
54 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Remuneration report

continued

2 Directors’ interests in long-term incentive schemes
Directors’ Share Schemes

Chief Executive
Sir Stuart Rose
Performance Share Plan1

Deferred Share Bonus Plan2

Total

Executive directors
Kate Bostock
Performance Share Plan1

Deferred Share Bonus Plan2

Total

Ian Dyson
Performance Share Plan1

Deferred Share Bonus Plan2

Total

Steven Esom
Performance Share Plan1
Restricted Share Plan3

Total

Steven Sharp
Performance Share Plan1

Deferred Share Bonus Plan2

Restricted Share Plan3

Total

Maximum
shares
receivable at
31 March
2007 or 
date of 
appointment

Date of
award

Shares
awarded
during
the year

Maximum
Shares
shares
vested receivable at
29 March
during
2008
the year

Market
value 
on date 
of award
(p)

Earliest
date of
vesting

25/07/05
19/07/06
05/06/07
05/06/06
05/06/07

473,868
663,755
–
35,125
–

–
–
594,395
–
222,898

–
–
–
–
–

473,868
663,755
594,395
35,125
222,898

358.75 25/07/08
572.5 19/07/09
706.6 05/06/10
550.0 05/06/09
706.6 05/06/10

1,172,748

817,293

– 1,990,041

25/07/05
19/07/06
05/06/07
05/06/06
05/06/07

117,073
157,205
169,827
25,404
28,985

498,494

–
–
–
–
–

–

25/07/05
19/07/06
05/06/07
05/06/06
05/06/07

234,146
331,878
–
48,579
–

–
–
297,197
–
111,449

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

117,073
157,205
169,827
25,404
28,985

498,494

234,146
331,878
297,197
48,579
111,449

358.75 25/07/08
572.5 19/07/09
706.6 05/06/10
550.0 05/06/09
706.6 05/06/10

358.75 25/07/08
572.5 19/07/09
706.6 05/06/10
550.0 05/06/09
706.6 05/06/10

614,603

408,646

– 1,023,249

05/06/07
05/06/07

25/07/05
19/07/06
05/06/07
05/06/06
05/06/07
24/06/05

141,522
70,761

212,283

234,146
331,878
–
64,772
–
90,000

–
–

–

–
–

–

141,522
70,761

212,283

706.6 05/06/10
706.6 05/06/10

–
–
297,197
–
111,449
–

–
–
–
–
–
90,000

234,146
331,878
297,197
64,772
111,449
–

358.75 25/07/08
572.5 19/07/09
706.6 05/06/10
550.0 05/06/09
706.6 05/06/10
352.0 24/07/07

720,796

408,646

90,000 1,039,442

1 The number of performance shares is the maximum (100%) of the award that could be receivable by the director if the EPS performance conditions are fully met, as outlined 

on page 50. 

2 Full details of the Deferred Share Bonus Plan are set out in note 12 to the financial statements on page 75.

3 Steven Sharp and Steven Esom were awarded these shares before they were appointed executive directors. Steven Sharp’s shares vested on 24 July 2007 at a market price 

of 642.5p. Full details of the Restricted Share Plan are set out in note 12 to the financial statements on page 75.

There have been no lapses for any of the above plans during this financial year.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 55

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

2 Directors’ interests in long-term incentive schemes continued
Directors’ Share Option Schemes

Maximum
options
receivable at
31 March
2007 or 
date of 
grant appointment

Date of

Options
granted
during
the year

Options Maximum
options
exercised/
lapsed
receivable 
during at 29 March
2008

the year

Option
price
(p)

Option
period

Chief Executive
Sir Stuart Rose
Executive Share Option Scheme1
SAYE

Total

Executive directors
Kate Bostock
Executive Share Option Scheme1
SAYE

Total

Ian Dyson
SAYE

Total

Steven Esom
SAYE

Total

Steven Sharp
Executive Share Option Scheme1

SAYE

Total

20/07/04 979,825
4,613
25/11/05

984,438

24/11/04 249,627
2,679
25/11/05

252,306

25/11/05

23/11/07

4,613

4,613

1,856

1,856

20/07/04 302,593
24/11/04 104,010
2,679
25/11/05

–
–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–
–

409,282

– 

– 979,825
4,613
–

– 984,438

– 249,627
2,679
–

– 252,306

–

–

–

–

4,613

4,613

1,856

1,856

– 302,593
– 104,010
2,679
–

– 409,282

347.0
349.0

20/07/07–19/07/14
01/01/11–30/06/11

336.5
349.0

24/11/07–23/11/14
01/01/09–30/06/09

349.0

01/01/11–30/06/11

517.0

01/01/11–30/06/11

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

347.0
336.5
349.0

20/07/07–19/07/14
24/11/07–23/11/14
01/01/09–30/06/09

1 The Executive Share Options have all been held for three years and can be exercised under the scheme rules; the option price is below the market value on 29 March 2008 for all

options; the performance criteria attached to the Executive Share Options Scheme is described on page 50.

There have been no exercises or lapses for any of the above schemes during this financial year.

The market price of the shares at the end of the financial year was 396.25p; the highest and lowest share prices during the financial year were 749.0p and 356.25p respectively.

For both the Directors’ interests in long-term incentive schemes tables, the explanation of the performance criteria attached to the Performance Share Plan and the Executive
Share Option Scheme on page 50 have been audited.

Approved by the Board
Louise Patten, Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
London
19 May 2008

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
56 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Auditors’ report

Independent auditors report to the members of 
Marks and Spencer Group plc
We have audited the group and parent company financial
statements (the ‘financial statements’) of Marks and Spencer
Group plc for the year ended 29 March 2008 which comprise
the Consolidated and Company income statements, the
Consolidated and Company balance sheets, the Consolidated
and Company cash flow statements, the Consolidated
statement of recognised income and expense, the Company
statement of changes in shareholders’ equity and the 
related group and parent company notes. These financial
statements have been prepared under the accounting policies
set out therein. We have also audited the information in the
Remuneration report that is described as having been audited.

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditors
The directors’ responsibilities for preparing the Annual report,
the Remuneration report and the financial statements in
accordance with applicable law and International Financial
Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European
Union are set out in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities. 

Our responsibility is to audit the financial statements 
and the part of the Remuneration report to be audited in
accordance with relevant legal and regulatory requirements
and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). 
This report, including the opinion, has been prepared for and
only for the Company’s members as a body in accordance
with Section 235 of the Companies Act 1985 and for no other
purpose. We do not, in giving this opinion, accept or assume
responsibility for any other purpose or to any other person to
whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come
save where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.

We report to you our opinion as to whether the financial
statements give a true and fair view and whether the financial
statements and the part of the Remuneration report to be
audited have been properly prepared in accordance with 
the Companies Act 1985 and, as regards the Group financial
statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. We also report to
you whether in our opinion the information given in the Group
Directors’ report is consistent with the financial statements.
The information given in the Group Directors’ report includes
that specific information presented in Key performance
indicators and Business review that is cross referred from 
the Business review section of the Group Directors’ report.

In addition we report to you if, in our opinion, the Company has
not kept proper accounting records, if we have not received all
the information and explanations we require for our audit, or if
information specified by law regarding directors’ remuneration
and other transactions is not disclosed.

We review whether the Corporate governance statement
reflects the Company’s compliance with the nine provisions 
of the Combined Code (2006) specified for our review by 
the Listing Rules of the Financial Services Authority, and we
report if it does not. We are not required to consider whether
the Board’s statements on internal control cover all risks 
and controls, or form an opinion on the effectiveness of the
Group’s corporate governance procedures or its risk and
control procedures.

We read other information contained in the Annual report 
and consider whether it is consistent with the audited 
financial statements. The other information comprises 
only the Key performance indicators, the Business review, 
the Financial review, the Corporate governance statement, 
the unaudited part of the Remuneration report, the Group
financial record and the Shareholder information. We consider
the implications for our report if we become aware of any
apparent misstatements or material inconsistencies with 
the financial statements. Our responsibilities do not extend 
to any other information.

Basis of audit opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International
Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland) issued by the Auditing
Practices Board. An audit includes examination, on a test
basis, of evidence relevant to the amounts and disclosures 
in the financial statements and the part of the Remuneration
report to be audited. It also includes an assessment of the
significant estimates and judgments made by the directors 
in the preparation of the financial statements, and of whether
the accounting policies are appropriate to the Group’s and
Company’s circumstances, consistently applied and
adequately disclosed.

We planned and performed our audit so as to obtain all 
the information and explanations which we considered
necessary in order to provide us with sufficient evidence 
to give reasonable assurance that the financial statements 
and the part of the Remuneration report to be audited are 
free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud 
or other irregularity or error. In forming our opinion we also
evaluated the overall adequacy of the presentation of
information in the financial statements and the part of the
Remuneration report to be audited.

Opinion
In our opinion:

(cid:129) the financial statements give a true and fair view, in

accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union,
of the state of the Group’s and the Parent Company’s affairs
as at 29 March 2008 and of the Group’s and the Parent
Company’s profit and cash flows for the year then ended;

(cid:129) the financial statements and the part of the Remuneration

report to be audited have been properly prepared in
accordance with the Companies Act 1985 and, as 
regards the group financial statements, Article 4 of the 
IAS Regulation; and

(cid:129) the information given in the Group Directors’ report 

is consistent with the financial statements.

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Registered Auditors
London
19 May 2008

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 57

Consolidated income statement

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Revenue – continuing operations

Operating profit – continuing operations
Finance income
Finance costs

Analysed between:
Before exceptional finance costs
Exceptional finance costs

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation – continuing operations

Analysed between:
Before property disposals and exceptional items
Profit on property disposals
Exceptional pension credit
Exceptional finance costs

Income tax expense

Profit on ordinary activities after taxation – continuing operations
Profit from discontinued operation

Profit for the year

Attributable to:
Equity shareholders of the Company
Minority interests

Basic earnings per share
Diluted earnings per share
Basic earnings per share from continuing operations
Diluted earnings per share from continuing operations

Non-GAAP measure:
Adjusted profit before taxation (£m)
Adjusted basic earnings per share from continuing operations
Adjusted diluted earnings per share from continuing operations

52 weeks
ended
29 March
2008
£m

52 weeks
ended
31 March 
2007
£m

9,022.0

8,588.1

1,211.3
64.4
(146.6)

1,045.9
33.8
(143.0)

(146.6)
–

1,129.1

1,007.1
27.0
95.0
–

(112.6)
(30.4)

936.7

965.2
1.9
–
(30.4)

(308.1)

(277.5)

821.0
–

821.0

821.7
(0.7)

821.0

49.2p
48.7p
49.2p
48.7p

1,007.1
43.6p
43.2p

659.2
0.7

659.9

659.9
–

659.9

39.1p
38.5p
39.1p
38.5p

965.2
40.4p
39.8p

Notes

2, 3

2, 3

5

5

5

4

3

2, 11

5

6

7

8A

8B

8A

8B

1

8A

8B

Consolidated statement of recognised
income and expense

52 weeks
ended
29 March
2008
£m

52 weeks
ended
31 March
2007
£m

Profit for the year 

Foreign currency translation differences
Actuarial gains/(losses) on retirement benefit asset/deficit
Cash flow and net investment hedges
– losses deferred in equity
– recycled and reported in net profit
– amount recognised in inventories
Tax on items taken directly to equity

Net gains not recognised in the income statement

Total recognised income and expense for the year

Attributable to:
Equity shareholders of the Company
Minority interests

821.0

21.3
605.4

(33.5)
1.3
2.4
(185.7)

411.2

659.9

(14.0)
(8.6)

(7.4)
10.7
2.1
24.5

7.3

1,232.2

667.2

1,232.9
(0.7)

1,232.2

667.2
–

667.2

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
58 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Consolidated balance sheet

Assets
Non-current assets
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Investment property
Investment in joint venture
Other financial assets
Retirement benefit asset
Trade and other receivables
Derivative financial instruments
Deferred tax assets

Current assets
Inventories
Other financial assets
Trade and other receivables
Derivative financial instruments
Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Liabilities
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Derivative financial instruments
Borrowings and other financial liabilities
Partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme
Current tax liabilities
Provisions

Non-current liabilities
Borrowings and other financial liabilities
Partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme
Retirement benefit deficit
Trade and other payables
Derivative financial instruments
Provisions
Deferred tax liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity
Called-up share capital – equity
Share premium account
Capital redemption reserve
Hedging reserve
Other reserve
Retained earnings

Total shareholders’ equity
Minority interests in equity

Total equity

As at
29 March
2008
£m

As at
31 March
2007
£m

Notes

13

14

15

16

17

11

18

22

24

17

18

22

19

20

22

21

21

23

21

21

11

20

22

23

24

305.5
4,704.0
25.0
9.6
3.0
504.0
410.0
18.2
–

194.1
4,044.5
25.1
9.3
3.0
–
247.0
–
11.6

5,979.3

4,534.6

488.9
48.8
307.6
18.4
318.0

1,181.7

416.3
50.9
196.7
2.4
180.1

846.4

7,161.0

5,381.0

976.6
35.1
878.6
50.0
37.5
11.1

1,043.9
8.3
461.0
–
87.3
5.7

1,988.9

1,606.2

1,936.5
673.2
20.5
191.2
–
14.6
372.1

1,234.5
496.9
283.3
87.6
0.2
16.8
7.3

3,208.1

2,126.6

5,197.0

3,732.8

1,964.0

1,648.2

26, 27

27

27

27

27

27

396.6
231.4
2,199.9
(36.9)
(6,542.2)
5,707.9

1,956.7
7.3

424.9
202.9
2,168.5
(4.4)
(6,542.2)
5,397.1

1,646.8
1.4

1,964.0

1,648.2

The financial statements were approved by the Board and authorised for issue on 19 May 2008. The financial statements also
comprise the notes on pages 60 to 91.

Sir Stuart Rose, Chief Executive
Ian Dyson, Group Finance and Operations Director

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 59

Consolidated cash flow information

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

52 weeks
ended
29 March
2008
£m

52 weeks
ended
31 March
2007
£m

Notes

Consolidated cash flow statement
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash generated from operations 
– continuing
– discontinued
Tax paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired
Disposal of subsidiary, net of cash disposed
Capital expenditure and financial investment
Interest received

Net cash outflow from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Interest paid
Exceptional interest paid
Other debt financing
Equity dividends paid
Other equity financing

Net cash outflow from financing activities

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from activities
Effects of exchange rate changes
Opening net cash

Closing net cash

29A

29B

25

29C

29D

29E

1,236.0
–
(166.2)

1,442.6
0.7
(150.8)

1,069.8

1,292.5

(46.4)
–
(924.6)
4.8

(966.2)

(88.9)
–
954.5
(343.6)
(556.2)

(34.2)

69.4
1.5
47.0

–
48.8
(712.8)
13.2

(650.8)

(123.4)
(21.6)
(479.2)
(260.6)
9.2

(875.6)

(233.9)
(1.5)
282.4

47.0

30A

117.9

Reconciliation of net cash flow to movement in net debt
Opening net debt
Net cash inflow/(outflow) from activities
(Decrease)/increase in current financial assets
(Increase)/decrease in debt financing
Debt financing net of liquid resources disposed with subsidiary
Debt financing net of liquid resources acquired with subsidiaries
Fair value movement on derivatives
Partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme (non-cash)
Exchange and other non-cash movements

Movement in net debt

Closing net debt

52 weeks
ended
29 March
2008
£m

52 weeks
ended
31 March
2007
£m

(1,949.5)
69.4
(2.8)
(954.5)
–
(29.6)
–
(199.0)
(28.9)

(1,729.3)
(233.9)
2.6
479.2
(16.8)
–
67.0
(495.6)
(22.7)

(1,145.4)

(220.2)

(3,094.9)

(1,949.5)

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
60 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

1 Accounting policies
Basis of preparation
The financial statements have been prepared in accordance
with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as
adopted by the European Union and with those parts of the
Companies Act 1985 applicable to companies reporting 
under IFRS.

The following IFRS, International Financial Reporting
Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) interpretations and
amendments have been adopted in the financial statements:

IFRS 7 – ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’ and the
complementary amendment to IAS 1 – ‘Presentation of
Financial Statements – Capital Disclosures’ were issued in
August 2005 and have introduced revised and additional
disclosures. This implementation has had no impact on 
the results or net assets of the Group.

IFRIC 11 – ‘IFRS 2 – Group and Treasury Share Transactions’
was issued in November 2006. It clarifies the guidance for
applying share-based payment arrangements to the separate
financial statements of each group company. It is required 
to be implemented by the Group from 30 March 2008. 
It has had no material impact on the results or net assets 
of the Group but has led to a prior year adjustment in the
Company’s financial statements. 

IFRIC 14 – ‘The Limit on a Defined Benefit Asset, Minimum
Funding Requirements and their Interaction’ was issued in 
July 2007. It limits the recognition of a defined benefit asset
when minimum funding requirements exist within a plan. It 
was implemented by the Group from 1 April 2007 and had 
no material impact on the results or net assets of the Group.

The following IFRS, IFRIC interpretations and amendments
have been issued by the International Accounting Standards
Board during the year but are not yet effective and have not
been early adopted by the Group:

IFRIC 13 – ‘Customer Loyalty Programmes’ was issued in
June 2007. It explains how entities that grant loyalty award
credits should account for their obligations to provide free 
or discounted goods or services to customers who redeem
such award credits. It is required to be implemented by the
Group from 30 March 2008 and will have no material impact
on the results or net assets of the Group.

IFRS 3 (Revised) – ‘Business Combinations’ was issued 
in January 2008. It addresses the guidance for applying 
the acquisition method of accounting. It is required to be
implemented prospectively by the Group from 4 April 2010.

IAS 1 (Revised) – ‘Presentation of Financial Statements’ was
issued in January 2008. It affects the presentation of owner
changes in equity and of comprehensive income. It does not
change the recognition, measurement or disclosure of specific
transactions and other events required by other IFRS. It is
required to be implemented by the Group from 29 March 2009.

Amendment to IAS 27 (Revised) – ‘Consolidated and Separate
Financial Statements’ was issued in January 2008. The
amendments relate primarily to accounting for non-controlling
interests and the loss of control of a subsidiary. It is required 
to be implemented by the Group from 4 April 2010.

Marks and Spencer Scottish Limited Partnership has taken
exemption under paragraph 7 of the Partnership and Unlimited
Companies (Accounts) Regulations 1993 (SI 1993/1820) from
the requirement to prepare and deliver accounts in accordance
with the Companies Act.

A summary of the Company’s and the Group’s accounting
policies is given below:

Accounting convention
The financial statements are drawn up on the historical cost
basis of accounting, except as disclosed in the accounting
policies set out below.

Basis of consolidation
The Group financial statements incorporate the financial
statements of Marks and Spencer Group plc and all 
its subsidiaries made up to the year-end date. Where
necessary, adjustments are made to the financial statements 
of subsidiaries to bring the accounting policies used in line 
with those used by the Group.

Subsidiary undertakings are all entities over which the 
Group has the power to govern the financial and operating
policies generally accompanying a shareholding of more 
than one half of the voting rights. Subsidiary undertakings
acquired during the year are recorded using the acquisition
method of accounting and their results included from the 
date of acquisition.

The separable net assets, both tangible and intangible of the
newly acquired subsidiary undertakings are incorporated into
the financial statements on the basis of the fair value as at 
the effective date of control.

Results of subsidiary undertakings disposed of during the
financial year are included in the financial statements up to 
the effective date of disposal. Where a business component
representing a separate major line of business is disposed of,
or classified as held-for-sale, it is classified as a discontinued
operation. The post-tax profit or loss of the discontinued
operation is shown as a single amount on the face of the
income statement, separate from the other results of the Group.

Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains 
on transactions between Group companies are eliminated.

Revenue
Revenue comprises sales of goods to customers outside the
Group less an appropriate deduction for actual and expected
returns, discounts and loyalty scheme voucher costs, and is
stated net of Value Added Tax and other sales taxes. Sales 
of furniture and online sales are recorded on delivery to the
customer.

Exceptional items
Exceptional income and charges are those items that are
largely one-off in nature and create significant volatility in
reported earnings and are therefore reported separately 
in the income statement.

Dividends
Final dividends are recorded in the financial statements in 
the period in which they are approved by the Company’s
shareholders. Interim dividends are recorded in the period 
in which they are approved and paid.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 61

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

1 Accounting policies continued
Pensions
Funded pension plans are in place for the Group’s UK
employees and the majority of employees overseas. The
assets of these pension plans include a property partnership
interest and various equities and bonds. The equities and
bonds are managed by third-party investment managers 
and are held separately in trust.

Regular valuations are prepared by independent professionally
qualified actuaries in respect of the defined benefit schemes.
These determine the level of contribution required to fund the
benefits set out in the rules of the plans and allow for the
periodic increase of pensions in payment. The service cost 
of providing retirement benefits to employees during the year,
together with the cost of any benefits relating to past service, 
is charged to operating profit in the year.

A credit representing the expected return on the assets of the
retirement benefit schemes during the year is included within
interest. This is based on the market value of the assets of the
schemes at the start of the financial year.

A charge is also made within interest representing the
expected increase in the liabilities of the retirement benefit
schemes during the year. This arises from the liabilities of the
schemes being one year closer to payment.

Capitalised software development costs are amortised on a
straight-line basis over their expected economic lives, normally
between three to five years.

Property, plant and equipment
A Land and buildings
The Group’s policy is to state property, plant and equipment at
cost less accumulated depreciation and not to revalue property
for accounting purposes.

B Interest
Interest is not capitalised.

C Depreciation
Depreciation is provided to write off the cost of tangible non-
current assets (including investment properties), less estimated
residual values, by equal annual instalments as follows:

(cid:129) freehold land – not depreciated;

(cid:129) freehold and leasehold buildings with a remaining lease term
over 50 years – depreciated to their residual value over their
estimated remaining economic lives;

(cid:129) leasehold buildings with a remaining lease term of less 

than 50 years – over the remaining period of the lease; and

(cid:129) fixtures, fittings and equipment – 3 to 25 years according 

to the estimated life of the asset.

The difference between the market value of the assets and 
the present value of accrued pension liabilities is shown as 
an asset or liability in the balance sheet. Assets are only
recognised if they are recoverable.

Residual values and useful economic lives are reviewed annually.
Depreciation is charged on all additions to, or disposals of,
depreciating assets in the year of purchase or disposal. Any
impairment in value is charged to the income statement.

Actuarial gains and losses are recognised immediately in 
the statement of recognised income and expense.

Payments to defined contribution retirement benefit schemes
are charged as an expense as they fall due.

Intangible assets
A Goodwill
Goodwill arising on consolidation represents the excess of the
cost of acquisitions over the Group’s interest in the fair value of
the identifiable assets and liabilities (including intangible assets)
of the acquired entity at the date of the acquisition. Goodwill is
recognised as an asset and assessed for impairment at least
annually. Any impairment is recognised immediately in the
income statement.

Upon disposal of a subsidiary the attributable goodwill is
included in the calculation of the profit or loss arising on
disposal. Goodwill written off to reserves under UK GAAP prior
to 31 March 1998 has not been reinstated and is not included
in determining any subsequent profit or loss on disposal.

B Brands
Acquired brand values are held on the balance sheet at cost
and amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated
useful lives. Any impairment in value is recognised immediately
in the income statement.

C Software intangibles
Where computer software is not an integral part of a 
related item of computer hardware, the software is treated 
as an intangible asset. Capitalised software costs include
external direct costs of material and services and the payroll
and payroll-related costs for employees who are directly
associated with the project.

D Assets held under leases
Where assets are financed by leasing agreements where 
the risks and rewards are substantially transferred to the 
Group (finance leases) the assets are treated as if they had
been purchased outright, and the corresponding liability 
to the leasing company is included as an obligation under 
finance leases. Depreciation on leased assets is charged 
to the income statement on the same basis as owned 
assets. Leasing payments are treated as consisting of 
capital and interest elements and the interest is charged 
to the income statement.

All other leases are operating leases and the costs in respect
of operating leases are charged on a straight-line basis over
the lease term. The value of any lease incentive received to
take on an operating lease (for example, rent-free periods) is
recognised as deferred income and is released over the life 
of the lease.

Investment properties
Investment properties are recorded at cost less accumulated
depreciation and any recognised impairment loss.

Leasehold prepayments
Payments made to acquire leasehold land are included 
in prepayments at cost and are amortised over the life 
of the lease.

Share-based payments
The Group issues equity-settled share-based payments to
certain employees. A fair value for the equity-settled share
awards is measured at the date of grant. The Group measures
the fair value of each award using the Black-Scholes model
where appropriate.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
62 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

1 Accounting policies continued
The fair value of each award is recognised as an expense over
the vesting period on a straight-line basis, after allowing for an
estimate of the share awards that will eventually vest. The level
of vesting is reviewed annually; and the charge is adjusted to
reflect actual and estimated levels of vesting.

Inventories
Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable
value using the retail method, which is computed on the 
basis of selling price less the appropriate trading margin. 
All inventories are finished goods.

Foreign currencies
The results of overseas subsidiaries are translated at the
weighted average of monthly exchange rates for sales and
profits. The balance sheets of overseas subsidiaries are
translated at year end exchange rates. The resulting exchange
differences are dealt with through reserves and reported in the
consolidated statement of recognised income and expense.

Transactions denominated in foreign currencies are translated
at the exchange rate at the date of the transaction. Foreign
currency assets and liabilities held at the balance sheet date
are translated at the closing balance sheet rate. The resulting
exchange gain or loss is recognised within the income statement.

Taxation
The tax charge comprises current tax payable and deferred tax.

The current tax charge represents an estimate of the amounts
payable to tax authorities in respect of the Group’s taxable
profits and is based on an interpretation of existing tax laws.

Deferred tax is recognised on temporary differences between
the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the balance sheet
and its tax base at tax rates that are expected to apply when
the asset is realised or the liability settled, based on tax rates
that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the
balance sheet date.

Deferred tax is not recognised in respect of:

(cid:129) the initial recognition of goodwill that is not tax deductible; and

(cid:129) the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction
which is not a business combination and at the time of the
transaction does not affect accounting or taxable profits.

B Investments and other financial assets
Investments and other financial assets are classified as either
‘available for sale’, ‘fair value through profit or loss’ or ‘held 
to maturity’. They are initially measured at cost, including
transaction costs, with the exception of ‘fair value through
profit and loss’. Where securities are designated as ‘fair value
through profit or loss’, gains and losses arising from changes 
in fair value are included in net profit or loss for the period. 
For ‘available for sale’ investments, gains or losses arising 
from changes in fair value are recognised directly in equity, 
until the security is disposed of or is determined to be
impaired, at which time the cumulative gain or loss previously
recognised in equity is included in the net profit or loss for the
period. Equity investments that do not have a quoted market
price in an active market and whose fair value cannot be
reliably measured by other means are held at cost. ‘Held to
maturity’ investments are measured at amortised cost using
the effective interest method.

Investments in subsidiaries are held at cost less impairment.
Dividends received from the pre-acquisition profits of
subsidiaries are deducted from the cost of investment.

C Classification of financial liabilities and equity
Financial liabilities and equity instruments are classified
according to the substance of the contractual arrangements
entered into. An equity instrument is any contract that
evidences a residual interest in the assets of the Group 
after deducting all of its liabilities.

D Bank borrowings
Interest-bearing bank loans and overdrafts are recorded at the
proceeds received, net of direct issue costs. Finance charges,
including premiums payable on settlement or redemption and
direct issue costs, are accounted for on an effective interest
rate method and are added to the carrying amount of the
instrument to the extent that they are not settled in the period
in which they arise.

E Loan notes
Long-term loans are held at amortised cost unless the loan 
is hedged by a derivative financial instrument in which case
hedge accounting treatment will apply.

F Trade payables
Trade payables are stated at their nominal value.

Deferred tax assets are only recognised when it is probable
that taxable profits will be available against which the deferred
tax asset can be utilised.

G Equity instruments
Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded 
at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs.

Deferred tax liabilities are not provided in respect of
undistributed profits of non-UK resident subsidiaries where 
(i) the Group is able to control the timing of distribution of such
profits; and (ii) it is not probable that a taxable distribution will
be made in the foreseeable future.

Financial instruments
Financial assets and liabilities are recognised on the Group’s
balance sheet when the Group becomes a party to the
contractual provisions of the instrument.

A Trade receivables
Trade receivables are recorded at their nominal amount less 
an allowance for any doubtful debts.

Derivative financial instruments and hedging activities
The Group primarily uses interest rate swaps and forward foreign
currency contracts to manage its exposures to fluctuating
interest and foreign exchange rates. These instruments are
initially recognised at fair value on the trade date and are
subsequently remeasured at their fair value at the balance
sheet date. The method of recognising the resulting gain or
loss is dependent on whether the derivative is designated as 
a hedging instrument and the nature of the item being hedged.
The Group designates certain hedging derivatives as either:

(cid:129) a hedge of a highly probable forecast transaction or 

change in the cash flows of a recognised asset or liability 
(a cash flow hedge);

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 63

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

1 Accounting policies continued
(cid:129) a hedge of the exposure to change in the fair value of 
a recognised asset or liability (a fair value hedge); or

(cid:129) a hedge of the exposure on the translation of net

investments in foreign entities (a net investment hedge).

Underlying the definition of fair value is the presumption that
the Group is a going concern without any intention of materially
curtailing the scale of its operations.

For those of the Group’s derivative instruments stated at fair
value, the fair value will be determined by the Group applying
discounted cash flow analysis using quoted market rates as 
an input into the valuation model.

In determining the fair value of a derivative, the appropriate
quoted market price for an asset held is the bid price, and 
for a liability issued is the offer price.

At inception of a hedging relationship, the hedging instrument
and the hedged item are documented and prospective
effectiveness testing is performed. During the life of the hedging
relationship, effectiveness testing is continued to ensure the
instrument remains an effective hedge of the transaction.

In order to qualify for hedge accounting, the following
conditions must be met:

(cid:129) formal designation and documentation at inception of 
the hedging relationship, detailing the risk management
objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge;

(cid:129) the hedge is expected to be highly effective in achieving
offsetting changes in fair value or cash flows attributable 
to the hedged risk;

(cid:129) for a cash flow hedge, a forecast transaction that is 
the subject of the hedge must be highly probable;

(cid:129) the effectiveness of the hedge can be reliably measured; and

(cid:129) the hedge is assessed on an ongoing basis and determined

actually to have been highly effective throughout its life.

A Cash flow hedges
Changes in the fair value of derivative financial instruments 
that are designated and effective as hedges of future cash
flows are recognised directly in equity and any ineffective portion
is recognised immediately in the income statement. If the firm
commitment or forecast transaction that is the subject of a
cash flow hedge results in the recognition of a non-financial
asset or liability, then, at the time the asset or liability is
recognised, the associated gains or losses on the derivative
that had previously been recognised in equity are included in
the initial measurement of the asset or liability. For hedges that
do not result in the recognition of an asset or a liability, amounts
deferred in equity are recognised in the income statement in the
same period in which the hedged items affect net profit or loss.

B Fair value hedges
For an effective hedge of an exposure to changes in the fair
value, the hedged item is adjusted for changes in fair value
attributable to the risk being hedged with the corresponding
entry in profit or loss. Gains and losses from re-measuring the
derivative, or for non-derivatives the foreign currency component
of its carrying amount, are recognised in profit or loss.

C Net investment hedges
Changes in the fair value of derivative or non-derivative
financial instruments that are designated and effective as
hedges of the net investments are recognised directly in 
equity and any ineffective portion is recognised immediately 
in the income statement.

Changes in the fair value of derivative financial instruments 
that do not qualify for hedge accounting are recognised in 
the income statement as they arise.

Hedge accounting is discontinued when the hedging
instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, or 
no longer qualifies for hedge accounting. At that time, any
cumulative gain or loss on the hedging instrument recognised
in equity is retained in equity until the forecast transaction
occurs. If a hedged transaction is no longer expected to 
occur, the net cumulative gain or loss recognised in equity 
is transferred to net profit or loss for the period.

The Group does not use derivatives to hedge income
statement translation exposures.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements
The preparation of consolidated financial statements requires
the Group to make estimates and assumptions that affect 
the application of policies and reported amounts. Estimates
and judgements are continually evaluated and are based on
historical experience and other factors including expectations
of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the
circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates.
The estimates and assumptions which have a significant risk 
of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amount of
assets and liabilities are discussed below:

A Impairment of goodwill
The Group is required to test, at least annually, whether
goodwill has suffered any impairment. The recoverable amount
is determined based on value in use calculations. The use of
this method requires the estimation of future cash flows and
the choice of a suitable discount rate in order to calculate the
present value of these cash flows. Actual outcomes could vary.

B Impairment of property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are reviewed for impairment if
events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying
amount may not be recoverable. When a review for impairment
is conducted, the recoverable amount is determined based on
value in use calculations prepared on the basis of management’s
assumptions and estimates.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

C Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation is provided so as to write down the assets to their
residual values over their estimated useful lives as set out on
page 61. The selection of these residual values and estimated
lives requires the exercise of management judgement.

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

D Post-retirement benefits
The determination of the pension cost and defined benefit
obligation of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes
depends on the selection of certain assumptions which include
the discount rate, inflation rate, salary growth, mortality and
expected return on scheme assets. Differences arising from
actual experiences or future changes in assumptions will be
reflected in subsequent periods. See note 11 for further details.

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
64 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

1 Accounting policies continued
E Refunds and loyalty scheme accruals
Accruals for sales returns and loyalty scheme redemption are estimated on the basis of historical returns and redemptions and
these are recorded so as to allocate them to the same period as the original revenue is recorded. These provisions are reviewed
regularly and updated to reflect management’s latest best estimates, however, actual returns and redemptions could vary from
these estimates.

Non-GAAP performance measures
The directors believe that the adjusted profit and earnings per share measures provide additional useful information for shareholders
on the underlying performance of the business. These measures are consistent with how business performance is measured internally.
The adjusted profit before tax measure is not a recognised profit measure under IFRS and may not be directly comparable with adjusted
profit measures used by other companies. The adjustments made to reported profit before tax are to exclude the following:

(cid:129) exceptional income and charges – These are largely one-off in nature and therefore create significant volatility in reported

earnings; and

(cid:129) profits and losses on the disposal of properties – These can vary significantly from year to year, again creating volatility in

reported earnings.

2 Segmental information
The Group’s primary reporting segments are geographic, with the Group operating in two geographic areas being the UK and
International. The International segment consists of the Marks & Spencer owned businesses in the Republic of Ireland, Hong Kong,
Taiwan, Greece, a number of other Balkan states, Switzerland, the Czech Republic, Slovakia, Latvia and Lithuania, together with
franchised operations. The geographic segments disclose revenue, operating profit and segment assets and liabilities by destination
and reflect management responsibility. Within each geographic segment the Group sells both food and general merchandise 
and secondary segment disclosure is given for revenue. Given that both food and general merchandise are sold from the same
locations it is not practical to provide segmental information on operating assets and capital expenditure at this level.

The geographic segment results are as follows:

Revenue

2007
£m

2008
£m

Operating profit

Segment assets

Segment liabilities

2008
£m

2007
£m

2008
£m

2007
£m

2008
£m

2007
£m

UK Retail
Before property disposals and 

exceptional items

Profit on property disposals
Exceptional pension credit1

International Retail
Owned stores2
Franchised stores

Before property disposals
(Loss)/profit on property disposals

Total
Total non-operating assets/(liabilities)3

Total assets/(liabilities)

8,309.1
–
–

7,977.5
–
–

972.9
28.0
95.0

8,309.1

7,977.5

1,095.9

426.7
286.2

712.9
–

712.9

369.5
241.1

610.6
–

610.6

44.5
71.9

116.4
(1.0)

115.4

956.5
0.2
–

956.7

45.4
42.1

87.5
1.7

89.2

9,022.0

8,588.1

1,211.3

1,045.9

6,514.4

4,988.4

(1,928.0)

(1,811.4)

397.1

295.7

(77.7)

(61.7)

6,911.5
249.5

5,284.1
96.9

(2,005.7)
(3,191.3)

(1,873.1)
(1,859.7)

7,161.0

5,381.0

(5,197.0)

(3,732.8)

1 The exceptional pension credit has arisen due to changes in the UK defined benefit plan relating to how members’ benefits build up from 1 October 2007. To the extent that

members have chosen the option to limit their future pensionable salary increases to inflation there is a past service credit to reflect the impact of adjusting their projected final
pensionable salaries.

2 Owned stores consist of the Marks & Spencer owned businesses in the Republic of Ireland, Hong Kong, Taiwan and, since 29 February 2008, Greece, a number of other Balkan
states and Switzerland, and since 20 March 2008, the Czech Republic, Slovakia, Latvia and Lithuania, which were included in franchised stores up to that date (see note 25).

3 Non-operating assets and liabilities include balances in respect of financing and taxation.

Revenue originates in the following geographical segments: United Kingdom £8,595.3m (last year £8,218.6m) and International
£426.7m (last year £369.5m). The value of goods exported from the UK, including shipments to international subsidiaries,
amounted to £499.7m (last year £438.0m).

Included within UK Retail is an operating profit of £28.3m (last year £19.5m) in respect of fees received from HSBC in relation 
to M&S Money.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 65

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

2 Segmental information continued
Other segment items:

Revenue
General merchandise
Food

Expenditure on intangible assets excluding goodwill

(see note 13)

Expenditure on property, plant and equipment

(see note 14)

Amortisation (see note 13)
Depreciation (see note 7, 14)

3 Expense analysis

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Selling and marketing expenses
Administrative expenses
Other operating income
Profit on property disposals
Exceptional pension credit (see note 2, 11)

Operating profit

United

Kingdom International
£m

£m

2008

Total
£m

United
Kingdom
£m

International
£m

2007

Total
£m

4,059.3
4,249.8

8,309.1

491.7
221.2

712.9

4,551.0
4,471.0

4,002.8
3,974.7

9,022.0

7,977.5

423.9
186.7

610.6

4,426.7
4,161.4

8,588.1

83.7

919.9
21.3
281.7

–

83.7

46.5

–

46.5

50.9
–
14.6

970.8
21.3
296.3

718.9
14.2
258.4

27.0
–
10.1

745.9
14.2
268.5

2008
£m

2007
£m

9,022.0
(5,535.2)

3,486.8
(1,912.7)
(534.5)
49.7
27.0
95.0

8,588.1
(5,246.9)

3,341.2
(1,779.2)
(584.1)
66.1
1.9
–

1,211.3

1,045.9

The cost of sales above represents cost of inventories recognised as an expense in the year.

The selling and marketing expenses and administrative expenses in the table above are further analysed in the table below:

Employee costs (see note 10A)
Occupancy costs
Repairs, renewals and maintenance of property
Depreciation and amortisation
Other costs

Operating expenses

Selling and
marketing
expenses
£m

Admini-
strative
expenses
£m

920.4
366.9
79.0
285.9
260.5

1,912.7

230.1
64.8
19.8
31.7
188.1

534.5

2008

Total
£m

1,150.5
431.7
98.8
317.6
448.6

Selling and
marketing
expenses
£m

928.8
310.5
55.4
264.4
220.1

2,447.2

1,779.2

Admini-
strative
expenses
£m

245.3
62.4
19.1
18.3
239.0

584.1

2007

Total
£m

1,174.1
372.9
74.5
282.7
459.1

2,363.3

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
66 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

4 Profit before taxation
The following items have been included in arriving at profit before taxation:

Net foreign exchange gains
Depreciation of property, plant, and equipment
– owned assets
– under finance leases
Amortisation of intangibles
Profit on property disposals
Operating lease rentals payable
– property
– fixtures, fittings and equipment
Exceptional pension credit (see note 2, 11)
Exceptional finance costs (see note 5)

2008
£m

(8.0)

290.4
5.9
21.3
(27.0)

167.5
8.4
(95.0)
–

2007
£m

(3.7)

266.8
1.7
14.2
(1.9)

143.4
7.2
–
30.4

Included in administrative expenses is the auditors’ remuneration, including expenses for audit and non-audit services, as follows:

Statutory audit services
Annual audit of the Company and the consolidated accounts
Audit of subsidiary companies

Non-audit-related services
Other services pursuant to legislation
Tax advisory services
Other services

2008
£m

2007
£m

0.3
0.8

1.1

0.3
0.4
0.1

0.8

0.3
0.8

1.1

0.1
0.2
0.2

0.5

In addition to the above, fees in respect of the annual audit of the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme were £nil (last year £0.1m).

5 Finance income/costs

Finance income
Bank and other interest receivable
Pension finance income (net) (see note 11E)

Finance income

Finance costs
Interest on bank borrowings
Amortisation of issue costs of bank loans
Interest payable on syndicated bank facility
Interest payable on medium term notes
Interest payable on securitised loan notes
Interest payable on finance leases
Dividend on non-equity B shares
Unwinding of discount on partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme

Before exceptional finance costs
Exceptional finance costs1

Finance costs

Net finance costs

2008
£m

5.5
58.9

64.4

1.6
0.3
30.0
84.0
–
3.4
–
27.3

146.6
–

146.6

82.2

2007
£m

13.0
20.8

33.8

4.1
1.5
6.8
77.5
19.0
2.2
0.2
1.3

112.6
30.4

143.0

109.2

1 Last year exceptional finance costs represented the unamortised transaction costs, a one-off make-whole premium and the cancellation of the swaps arising on the redemption 

of £317.2m of secured bonds. These bonds were redeemed in order to release properties for use in the limited partnership with the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 67

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

6 Income tax expense
A Taxation charge

Current tax
UK corporation tax at 30% (last year 30%)
– current year
– current year tax on exceptional finance costs
– prior years

Overseas current taxation

Total current taxation

Deferred tax (see note 24)
– current year
– prior years

Total deferred taxation

Total income tax expense

B Taxation reconciliation

Profit before tax

Taxation at the standard UK corporation tax rate of 30% (last year 30%)
Depreciation, charges and other amounts on non-qualifying fixed assets
Other income and expenses not taxable or deductible
Tax on exceptional finance costs not deductible
Overseas profits taxed at lower rates
Impact of change in UK corporation tax rate
Adjustments to tax charge in respect of prior periods

Total income tax expense

2008
£m

2007
£m

123.0
–
(13.1)

109.9
7.5

117.4

184.0
6.7

190.7

308.1

2008
£m

1,129.1

338.7
0.6
(1.3)
–
(6.8)
(16.7)
(6.4)

308.1

172.4
(6.5)
6.1

172.0
7.5

179.5

108.2
(10.2)

98.0

277.5

2007
£m

936.7

281.0
5.4
(1.0)
2.6
(6.4)
–
(4.1)

277.5

The post-exceptional effective tax rate was 27.3% (last year 29.6%) and the pre-exceptional effective tax rate was 27.0% (last
year 29.4%). The change in the standard UK corporation tax rate to 28% from April 2008 has resulted in a deferred tax credit 
of £16.7m, reducing the total effective tax rate by 1.5%.

7 Discontinued operation
On 28 April 2006, the Group disposed of Kings Super Markets Inc to a US investor group for US$61.5m excluding cash in the
business at the date of disposal. Depreciation of £0.3m incurred last year in the period before disposal has been excluded 
from the segmental disclosures in note 2.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
68 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

8 Earnings per share
The calculation of earnings per ordinary share is based on earnings after tax and the weighted average number of ordinary shares
in issue during the year.

The adjusted earnings per share figures have also been calculated based on earnings excluding the effect of property disposals
and exceptional items. These have been calculated to allow the shareholders to gain an understanding of the underlying trading
performance of the Group.

For diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue is adjusted to assume conversion of 
all dilutive potential ordinary shares. The Group has only one class of dilutive potential ordinary shares being those share options
granted to employees where the exercise price is less than the average market price of the Company’s ordinary shares during 
the year.

Details of the adjusted earnings per share are set out below:

Earnings after tax
Profit from discontinued operation

Earnings after tax – continuing
Property disposals (net of tax)
Exceptional pension credit (net of tax)
Exceptional finance costs (net of tax)

Adjusted earnings after tax – continuing

Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue
Potentially dilutive share options under Group’s share option schemes

Weighted average number of diluted ordinary shares

A Basic earnings per share

Basic earnings per share
Profit from discontinued operation per share

Basic earnings per share – continuing
Property disposals per share
Exceptional pension credit per share
Exceptional finance costs per share

Adjusted basic earnings per share – continuing

B Diluted earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share
Profit from discontinued operation per share

Diluted earnings per share – continuing
Property disposals per share 
Exceptional pension credit per share 
Exceptional finance costs per share 

Adjusted diluted earnings per share – continuing 

2008
£m

821.7
–

821.7
(27.0)
(66.5)
–

728.2

2007
£m

659.9
(0.7)

659.2
(1.4)
–
23.9

681.7

million

million

1,671.3
16.0

1,688.6
26.3

1,687.3

1,714.9

pence

49.2
–

49.2
(1.6)
(4.0)
–

43.6

pence

48.7
–

48.7
(1.6)
(3.9)
–

43.2

pence

39.1
–

39.1
(0.1)
–
1.4

40.4

pence

38.5
–

38.5
(0.1)
–
1.4

39.8

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 69

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

9 Dividends

Dividends on equity ordinary shares
Paid final dividend
Paid interim dividend

2008
per share

2007
per share

2008
£m

2007
£m

12.0p
8.3p

20.3p

9.2p
6.3p

15.5p

203.5
140.1

343.6

154.6
106.0

260.6

In addition, the directors have proposed a final dividend in respect of the year ended 29 March 2008 of 14.2p per share amounting
to a dividend of £217.9m. It will be paid on 11 July 2008 to shareholders who are on the Register of Members on 30 May 2008. 
In line with the requirements of IAS 10 – ‘Events after the Balance Sheet Date’, this dividend has not been recognised within 
these results.

10 Employees
A Aggregate remuneration
The aggregate remuneration and associated costs of Group employees were:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs
Share-based payments
Employee welfare and other personnel costs
Ex-gratia costs
Capitalised staff costs

Aggregate remuneration

Details of key management compensation are given in note 32D.

B Average number of employees

UK stores
– management and supervisory categories
– other
UK head office
– management and supervisory categories
– other
Overseas

Total average number of employees

2008

Total
£m

930.8
62.3
103.1
29.0
35.7
10.5
(20.9)

2007

Total
£m

931.3
75.7
111.9
27.3
32.5
5.1
(9.7)

1,150.5

1,174.1

2008

2007

5,267
62,820

5,235
64,074

2,599
927
3,776

2,396
850
3,316

75,389

75,871

If the number of hours worked was converted on the basis of a normal working week, the equivalent average number of full-time
employees for continuing operations would have been 52,276 (last year 52,670).

C Directors’ emoluments
Emoluments of directors of the Company are summarised below. Further details are given in the Remuneration report on pages
48 to 55.

Aggregate emoluments

The emoluments exclude payments to former directors of £262,000 (last year £307,000).

2008
£000

2007
£000

3,930

5,369

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
70 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

11 Retirement benefits
The Group provides pension arrangements for the benefit of its UK employees through the Marks & Spencer UK Pension
Scheme. This has a defined benefit section, which was closed to new entrants with effect from 1 April 2002, and a defined
contribution section which has been open to new members with effect from 1 April 2003. Further details of the pension scheme
can be found on page 34.

The defined benefit section operates on a final salary basis and at the year end had some 24,000 active members (last year
27,000), 58,000 deferred members (last year 57,000) and 39,000 pensioners (last year 37,000). At the year end, the defined
contribution section had some 8,000 active members (last year 7,000) and some 1,000 deferred members (last year 1,000).

The Group also operates a small funded defined benefit pension scheme in the Republic of Ireland. Retirement benefits also
include a UK post-retirement healthcare scheme and unfunded retirement benefits.

Within the total Group retirement benefit cost of £44.2m, excluding the exceptional pension credit, (last year £91.1m) £28.0m 
(last year £78.0m) relates to the UK defined benefit section, £11.7m (last year £8.6m) to the UK defined contribution section 
and £4.5m (last year £4.5m) to other retirement benefit schemes.

A Pensions and other post-retirement liabilities

Total market value of assets
Present value of scheme liabilities

Net funded pension plan asset/(deficit)
Unfunded retirement benefits
Post-retirement healthcare

Net retirement benefit asset/(deficit)

Analysed on the balance sheet as:
Retirement benefit asset
Retirement benefit deficit

2008
£m

2007
£m

5,045.5
(4,542.3)

5,227.5
(5,487.0)

503.2
(1.3)
(18.4)

483.5

504.0
(20.5)

483.5

(259.5)
(1.2)
(22.6)

(283.3)

–
(283.3)

(283.3)

B Financial assumptions
A full actuarial valuation of the UK defined benefit pension scheme was carried out at 31 March 2006 and showed a deficit of
£704.0m. The financial assumptions for the UK scheme and the most recent actuarial valuations of the other post-retirement
schemes have been updated by independent qualified actuaries to take account of the requirements of IAS 19 – ‘Retirement
Benefits’ and IFRIC 14 – ‘The Limit on a Defined Benefit Asset, Minimum Funding Requirements and their Interaction’ in order 
to assess the liabilities of the schemes.

Rate of increase in salaries
Rate of increase in pensions in payment for service
– pre-April 1997
– between April 1997 and July 2005
– post-July 2005
Discount rate
Inflation rate
Long-term healthcare cost increases

2008
%

3.1 to 4.5

2.8
3.5
2.4
6.8
3.5
8.5

2007
%

3.7

2.6
3.0
2.3
5.3
3.0
8.0

The amount of the surplus varies if the main financial assumptions change, particularly the discount rate. If the discount rate
increased/decreased by 0.1% the IAS 19 surplus would increase/decrease by c.£100m.

C Demographic assumptions
The demographic assumptions are in line with those adopted for the last formal actuarial valuation of the scheme. One of the most
significant demographic assumptions underlying the valuation is mortality. The post-retirement mortality assumptions are based 
on an analysis of the pensioner mortality trends under the scheme for the period to March 2006 updated to allow for anticipated
longevity improvements over the subsequent year. The specific mortality rates used are based on the PMA92 and PFA92 tables,
adjusted to allow for the experience of scheme pensioners. The life expectancies underlying the valuation are as follows:

Current pensioners (at age 65) – males

– females

Future pensioners (at age 65) – males

– females

2008
years

21.0
23.5
21.9
24.3

2007
years

21.0
23.5
21.9
24.3

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 71

11 Retirement benefits continued
D Analysis of assets and expected rates of return
The major categories of assets and as a percentage of total plan assets are:

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Property partnership interest
UK equities
Overseas equities
Government bonds
Corporate bonds
Cash and other

The expected long-term rates of return are:

Property partnership interest
UK equities
Overseas equities
Government bonds
Corporate bonds
Cash and other

Overall expected return

2008
£m

506.6
792.1
1,116.6
465.4
2,058.5
106.3

2007
£m

495.3
826.0
1,385.3
363.0
2,153.0
4.9

2008
%

10
16
22
9
41
2

2007
%

9
16
27
7
41
–

5,045.5

5,227.5

100

100

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

2008
%

6.0
8.3
8.3
4.6
6.0
5.0

6.7

2007
%

5.5
8.4
8.4
4.7
5.3
5.5

6.6

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

The overall expected return on assets assumption is derived as the weighted average of the expected returns from each of 
the main asset classes. The expected return for each asset class reflects a combination of historical performance analysis, 
the forward-looking views of financial markets (as suggested by the yields available) and the views of investment organisations.
Consideration is also given to the rate of return expected to be available for reinvestment.

At year end, the UK scheme indirectly held 479,356 (last year 463,964) ordinary shares in the Company through its investment 
in an Aquila Life UK Equity Index Fund.

E Analysis of amount charged against profits

Operating cost
Current service cost1
Curtailment gain
Exceptional pension credit

Finance cost
Expected return on plan assets
Interest on scheme liabilities

Net finance income

Total 

1 Includes £11.7m (last year £8.6m) in relation to defined contribution plans.

2008
£m

2007
£m

106.1
(3.0)
(95.0)

8.1

(342.7)
283.8

(58.9)

(50.8)

113.9
(2.0)
–

111.9

(282.0)
261.2

(20.8)

91.1

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
72 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

11 Retirement benefits continued
F Scheme assets
Changes in the fair value of the scheme assets are as follows:

Fair value of scheme assets at start of year
Expected return on scheme assets1
Employer contributions2, 3
Contributions from scheme members
Benefits paid
Actuarial loss
Exchange movement

Fair value of scheme assets at end of year

2008
£m

5,227.5
342.7
111.1
1.0
(220.4)
(422.6)
6.2

2007
£m

4,606.2
282.0
611.3
–
(191.8)
(80.4)
0.2

5,045.5

5,227.5

1 The actual return on scheme assets was a loss of £79.9m (last year gain of £201.6m).

2 The contribution for 2006/07 includes the additional contribution of the property partnership interest of £500.1m transferred into the UK defined benefit pension scheme on 

14 March 2007 and cash contributions of £57.7m paid in March 2006 plus £40.3m paid in April 2007 to increase contributions from 15.8% to 27.0%.

3 This year the Group has agreed to pre-fund £200.0m of its annual contribution to the UK defined benefit pension scheme for the next three years by contributing to the Trustee
rights to further income of the property backed partnership. Additional properties with a current market value of approximately £400.0m have been put into the partnership to
facilitate the transaction. The prepayment is in respect of annual contributions to the UK scheme at the rate of 24.3% of pensionable salaries up to 30 September 2008 and 
then 23.7% up to the next full actuarial valuation. It is estimated that approximately £76m of the prepayment will relate to the year ended 28 March 2009.

G Retirement benefit obligations
Changes in the present value of retirement benefit obligations are as follows:

Present value of obligation at start of year
Current service cost
Curtailment gain
Exceptional pension credit
Interest cost
Contributions from scheme members
Benefits paid
Actuarial gain
Acquisition of subsidiary
Exchange movement

Present value of obligation at end of year

Analysed as:
Present value of pension scheme liabilities
Unfunded pension plans
Post-retirement healthcare

Present value of obligation at end of year

H Cumulative actuarial gains and losses recognised in equity

Loss at start of year
Net actuarial gains/(losses) recognised in the year

Loss at end of year

I History of experience gains and losses

Experience adjustments arising on scheme assets
Experience (losses)/gains arising on scheme liabilities
Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of scheme liabilities

Actuarial gains/(losses) recognised in equity

2008
£m

(422.6)
(61.5)
1,089.5

605.4

2007
£m

(80.4)
18.8
53.0

(8.6)

2006
£m

454.3
20.0
(643.6)

(169.3)

2008
£m

5,510.8
106.1
(3.0)
(95.0)
283.8
1.0
(220.4)
(1,028.0)
0.4
6.3

2007
£m

5,401.1
113.9
(2.0)
–
261.2
–
(191.8)
(71.8)
–
0.2

4,562.0

5,510.8

4,542.3
1.3
18.4

5,487.0
1.2
22.6

4,562.0

5,510.8

2008
£m

(935.6)
605.4

(330.2)

2005
£m

77.4
(24.0)
(131.5)

(78.1)

2007
£m

(927.0)
(8.6)

(935.6)

UK GAAP
2004
£m

401.9
(30.3)
(157.8)

213.8

Fair value of scheme assets
Present value of scheme liabilities

Pension scheme asset/(deficit)

5,045.5
(4,542.3)

5,227.5
(5,487.0)

4,606.2
(5,381.3)

3,956.8
(4,611.0)

3,634.2
(4,280.1)

503.2

(259.5)

(775.1)

(654.2)

(645.9)

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 73

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

12 Share-based payments
The charge for share-based payments for the year was £29.0m (last year £27.3m). Further details of the option and share
schemes that the Group operates are provided in the Remuneration report on pages 48 to 55.

A Save As You Earn Share Option Scheme
Under the terms of the scheme, the Board may offer options to purchase ordinary shares in the Company once in each financial
year to those employees who enter into an HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) approved Save As You Earn (SAYE) savings contract.
HMRC rules limit the maximum amount saved to £250 per month. The price at which options may be offered is 80% of the
average mid-market price for three consecutive dealing days preceding the offer date. The options may normally be exercised
during the period of six months after the completion of the SAYE contract, either three or five years after entering the scheme.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

Outstanding at beginning of the period
Granted
Exercised
Forfeited
Expired

Outstanding at end of the period
Exercisable at end of period

Number
of options

33,241,616
7,716,437
(10,212,015)
(2,207,700)
(93,578)

28,444,760
948,372

2008

Weighted 
average
exercise price

2007

Weighted 
average
exercise price

Number
of options

40,403,625
327.6p
517.0p
6,569,527
234.8p (11,814,068)
(1,637,012)
450.7p
(280,456)
235.2p

403.1p
262.9p

33,241,616
726,615

261.6p
559.0p
232.4p
325.5p
258.0p

327.6p
243.4p

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

For SAYE share options exercised during the period, the weighted average share price at the date of exercise was 535.2p 
(last year 698.8p).

The fair values of the options granted during the year have been calculated using the Black-Scholes model assuming the 
inputs shown below:

Grant date
Share price at grant date
Exercise price
Option life in years
Risk-free rate
Expected volatility
Expected dividend yield
Fair value of option

2008

2007

3-year plan

5-year plan

3-year plan

5-year plan

Nov 07
646p
517p
3 years
4.6%
21.6%
2.7%
167.5p

Nov 07
646p
517p
5 years
4.6%
25.2%
2.7%
201.8p

Nov 06
698p
559p
3 years
5.4%
21.5%
2.2%
200.6p

Nov 06
698p
559p
5 years
5.3%
27.5%
2.2%
247.8p

Volatility has been estimated by taking the historic volatility in the Company’s share price over a three- or five-year period.

The resulting fair value is expensed over the service period of three or five years on the assumption that 20% of options will 
lapse over the service period as employees leave the Group.

Outstanding options granted under the UK Employees’ SAYE Scheme are as follows:

Options granted

January 2000
January 2001
January 2002
January 2003
January 2004
January 2005
January 2006
January 2007
January 2008

Number of options

Weighted average remaining
contractual life (years)

2008

2007

2008

2007

Option price

–
338,682
–
371,017
4,078,721
3,703,910
7,164,101
5,434,588
7,353,741

161,410
3,948,712
227,479
3,495,809
4,484,581
6,834,424
7,713,616
6,375,585
–

28,444,760

33,241,616

–
0.3
–
0.3
1.3
2.1
2.1
3.0
4.0

2.6

0.3
1.3
0.3
1.3
2.2
2.3
3.1
4.0
–

2.5

223p
156p
250p
283p
228p
280p
349p
559p
517p

328p

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
74 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

12 Share-based payments continued
B Executive Share Option Scheme
Under the terms of the Executive Share Option Scheme, last approved by shareholders in 2005, the Board may offer options 
to purchase ordinary shares in the Company to executive directors and senior managers at the market price on a date to be
determined prior to the date of the offer. No further options may be granted under any schemes other than the 2005 scheme.
No awards have been made under the 2005 scheme. Further details are set out in the Remuneration report on page 50.

Performance targets are assessed over a three-year period from the date of grant with no ability to retest any grants. Once
options have vested they can be exercised during the period up to 10 years from grant date.

Outstanding at beginning of the period
Exercised
Forfeited
Expired

Outstanding at end of the period
Exercisable at end of the period

Number
of options

12,017,117
(2,235,209)
(152,698)
(5,692)

9,623,518
8,444,937

2008

Weighted 
average
exercise price

341.2p
341.0p
348.6p
527.0p

341.0p
339.4p

Number
of options

18,135,466
(5,522,018)
(589,781)
(6,550)

12,017,117
3,537,471

2007

Weighted 
average
exercise price

333.5p
316.6p
334.8p
458.0p

341.2p
328.4p

For executive share options exercised during the period, the weighted average share price at the date of exercise was 645.5p 
(last year 632.3p).

The resulting fair value is expensed over the expected service period of five years on the assumption that 30% of options will 
lapse over the service period as employees leave the Company.

Outstanding options granted under all Executive Share Option Schemes are as follows:

Options granted

1984 Scheme
June 1997

1997 Scheme
June 1998
November 1998
June 1999

2000 Scheme
September 2000
June 2001
December 2001

2002 Scheme
June 2002
November 2002
June 2003
November 2003
February 2004
July 2004
November 2004
June 2005

Number of options

Weighted average remaining
contractual life (years)

2008

2007

2008

2007

Option price

–

5,692

161,863
7,425
98,880

232
135,989
71,658

659,465
47,150
1,502,053
36,109
33,111
4,831,318
859,684
1,178,581

247,778
7,425
127,521

3,445
196,303
74,161

760,394
66,980
1,975,461
77,078
33,111
6,236,497
868,599
1,336,672

9,623,518

12,017,117

–

0.2
0.6
1.2

2.5
3.3
3.7

4.2
4.7
5.2
5.7
5.8
6.3
6.7
7.2

5.9

0.2

1.2
1.6
2.2

3.4
4.2
4.7

5.2
5.6
6.2
6.6
6.8
7.3
7.6
8.2

6.8

527p

557p
404p
358p

215p
256p
350p

350p
353p
297p
270p
270p
347p
337p
352p

335p

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 75

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

12 Share-based payments continued
C Performance Share Plan
The Performance Share Plan is the primary long-term incentive plan for approximately 100 of the most senior managers and 
was first approved by shareholders in 2005. Under the plan, annual awards, based on a percentage of salary, may be offered. 
The extent to which the awards vest is based on adjusted earnings per share growth over three years. The value of any dividends
earned on the vested shares during the three years will also be paid on vesting. Further details are set out in the Remuneration
report on page 49. Awards under this scheme have been made in each year since 2005.

During the year, 3,414,413 shares (last year 3,511,040) were awarded under the plan. The weighted average fair value of the
shares awarded was 704.0p (last year 572.9p).

D Deferred Share Bonus Plan
The Deferred Share Bonus Plan was introduced in 2005/06 as part of the annual bonus scheme for approximately 450 of the
most senior managers. As part of the bonus scheme, the managers are required to defer a proportion of any bonus paid into
shares which will be held for three years. There are no further performance conditions on these shares, other than continued
employment, and the value of any dividends earned during the deferred period will be paid on vesting. 

During the year, 2,182,379 shares were awarded under the plan in relation to the 2006/07 annual bonus. The fair value of the
shares awarded was 706.6p.

E Restricted Share Plan
The Restricted Share Plan was established in 2000 as part of the reward strategy for retention and recruitment of senior managers
who are vital to the success of the business. The plan operates for senior managers below executive director level. Awards under
the plan are made as part of ongoing reviews of reward packages, and for recruitment. The shares are held in trust for a period 
of between one and three years, at which point they are released to the employee, subject to them still being in employment. 
The value of any dividends earned during the restricted period will also be paid at the time of vesting.

During the year, 328,165 shares (last year 38,622) have been awarded under the plan. The weighted average fair value of the
shares awarded was 604.6p (last year 578.0p).

F United Kingdom Share Incentive Plan
The Share Incentive Plan is a discretionary, all-employee plan, approved by HMRC, under which Freeshares may be allocated 
by the Company. The last award was made in June 2003, which will vest in June 2008.

G Share Matching Deal Plan
The Share Matching Deal Plan was introduced in 2006 for those employees who were eligible to receive a cash-only bonus. 
The scheme was not open to those employees who participated in the Deferred Share Bonus Plan. The Plan allows employees 
to invest a proportion of their bonus in shares of the Company. These investment shares must be held by the participant for 
three years, during which time they will receive dividends. At the end of the three-year holding period, if the participant is still 
in employment with the Company, and still holds the investment shares, they will receive one matching share for every four 
that they bought.

During the year, 26,603 (last year 41,086) matching shares have been awarded under the Share Matching Deal Plan, at a fair
value of 609.3p (last year 596.4p).

H Marks and Spencer Employee Benefit Trust
The Marks and Spencer Employee Benefit Trust (the Trust) holds 8,795,896 (last year 4,767,449) shares with a book value 
of £60.0m (last year £28.1m) and a market value of £34.9m (last year £32.3m). These shares were acquired by the Trust in 
the market. In addition, the Trust has entered into a call option to purchase up to 8.1 million of the Company’s shares. The 
Trust used funds provided by Marks and Spencer plc to meet the Group’s obligations. Awards are granted to employees at 
the discretion of Marks and Spencer plc and shares are awarded to employees by the Trust in accordance with the wishes 
of Marks and Spencer plc under senior executive share schemes, including the Restricted Share Plan. Dividends are waived 
on all of these plans except for the Deferred Bonus Share Plan and Restricted Share Plan where dividends are paid via a 
Dividend Reinvestment Plan for awards made in the form of forfeitable shares.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
76 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

13 Intangible assets

At 2 April 2006
Cost or valuation
Accumulated amortisation

Net book value

Year ended 31 March 2007
Opening net book value
Additions
Transfers
Disposals
Amortisation charge

Closing net book value

At 31 March 2007
Cost or valuation
Accumulated amortisation

Net book value

Year ended 29 March 2008
Opening net book value
Additions
Acquisition of subsidiaries
Transfers
Amortisation charge

Closing net book value

At 29 March 2008
Cost or valuation
Accumulated amortisation

Net book value

Goodwill
£m

Brands
£m

Computer
software
under
development
£m

Computer
software
£m

69.5
–

69.5

69.5
–
–
–
–

69.5

69.5
–

69.5

69.5
48.4
–
–
–

117.9

117.9
–

117.9

80.0
(8.0)

72.0

72.0
–
–
–
(5.3)

66.7

80.0
(13.3)

66.7

66.7
–
–
–
(5.4)

61.3

80.0
(18.7)

61.3

42.3
(27.0)

15.3

15.3
0.3
25.9
(0.1)
(8.9)

32.5

51.2
(18.7)

32.5

32.5
18.6
0.6
12.5
(15.9)

48.3

82.9
(34.6)

48.3

6.7
–

6.7

6.7
46.2
(25.9)
(1.6)
–

25.4

25.4
–

25.4

25.4
65.1
–
(12.5)
–

78.0

78.0
–

78.0

Total
£m

198.5
(35.0)

163.5

163.5
46.5
–
(1.7)
(14.2)

194.1

226.1
(32.0)

194.1

194.1
132.1
0.6
–
(21.3)

305.5

358.8
(53.3)

305.5

Goodwill of £69.5m relates to the acquisition of per una, which was acquired in October 2004. £34.3m of goodwill relates to the
acquisition of Marks and Spencer Marinopoulos B.V. in February 2008 and a further £14.1m of goodwill was recognised in March
2008 on the acquisition of COMS a.s. Goodwill is not amortised, but tested annually for impairment with the recoverable amount
being determined from value in use calculations. The key assumptions for the value in use calculations are those regarding the
discount rate, growth rates and changes in income and costs.

The Group prepares discounted cash flow forecasts based on financial forecasts approved by management covering a three-year
period, which takes account of both past performance and expectations for future market developments. Cash flows beyond this
three-year period are extrapolated using a growth rate of 2.0%, which does not exceed the long-term average growth rate for the
Group’s retail businesses. Management estimates the discount rate using a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments
of the time value of money and the risks specific to retail businesses. A pre-tax discount rate of 9.5% has been used.

Brands consist of the per una brand which is being amortised on a straight-line basis over a period of 15 years.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 77

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

14 Property, plant and equipment

At 2 April 2006
Cost
Accumulated depreciation

Net book value

Year ended 31 March 2007
Opening net book value
Exchange difference
Additions
Reclassification from investment property (see note 15)
Transfers
Disposals
Depreciation charge

Closing net book value

At 31 March 2007
Cost
Accumulated depreciation

Net book value

Year ended 29 March 2008
Opening net book value
Exchange difference
Additions
Acquisition of subsidiaries
Transfers
Disposals
Depreciation charge

Closing net book value

At 29 March 2008
Cost
Accumulated depreciation

Net book value

Fixtures,
fittings and
equipment
£m

Assets
in the
course of
construction
£m

Land and
buildings
£m

Total
£m

2,392.2
(82.2)

3,287.1
(2,061.8)

2,310.0

1,225.3

40.5
–

40.5

5,719.8
(2,144.0)

3,575.8

2,310.0
(2.7)
63.9
13.2
8.8
(6.4)
(13.9)

1,225.3
(1.6)
578.7
–
27.3
(10.7)
(254.9)

40.5
(0.2)
103.3
–
(36.1)
–
–

3,575.8
(4.5)
745.9
13.2
–
(17.1)
(268.8)

2,372.9

1,564.1

107.5

4,044.5

2,468.2
(95.3)

3,653.3
(2,089.2)

2,372.9

1,564.1

107.5
–

107.5

6,229.0
(2,184.5)

4,044.5

2,372.9
18.4
82.6
18.0
11.8
(73.8)
(8.5)

1,564.1
10.1
692.8
11.5
110.8
(5.2)
(287.8)

107.5
5.9
195.4
0.2
(122.6)
(0.1)
–

4,044.5
34.4
970.8
29.7
–
(79.1)
(296.3)

2,421.4

2,096.3

186.3

4,704.0

2,525.2
(103.8)

4,473.3
(2,377.0)

2,421.4

2,096.3

186.3
–

186.3

7,184.8
(2,480.8)

4,704.0

The net book value includes land and buildings of £42.2m (last year £43.7m) and equipment of £35.6m (last year £16.4m) where
the Group is a lessee under a finance lease.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
78 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

15 Investment property

Cost
At start of year
Reclassification to property, plant and equipment

At end of year

Depreciation
At start of year
Reclassification to property, plant and equipment
Depreciation charge

At end of year

Net book value

2008
£m

25.3
–

25.3

0.2
–
0.1

0.3

25.0

2007
£m

38.6
(13.3)

25.3

0.1
(0.1)
0.2

0.2

25.1

The investment properties were valued at £31.7m (last year £34.3m) as at 31 March 2008 by qualified professional valuers
working for CB Richard Ellis, Chartered Surveyors, acting in the capacity of external valuers.

All such valuers are Chartered Surveyors, being members of the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors (RICS). The properties
were valued on the basis of market value. All valuations were carried out in accordance with the RICS Appraisal and Valuation
Standards. As the investment properties are held at depreciated historical cost, this valuation has not been reflected in the
carrying value of the assets.

The Group received rental income of £1.5m (last year £1.7m) in respect of these investment properties.

16 Investment in joint venture

At start of year
Share of profit

At end of year

2008
£m

9.3
0.3

9.6

The joint venture represents a 50% equity interest in Hedge End Park Limited, a property investment company incorporated 
in Great Britain. The partner in the joint venture is J Sainsbury plc.

In relation to the Group’s interest in joint ventures, the assets and liabilities are shown below:

Non-current assets
Current assets
Current liabilities

Net assets

2008
£m

2.7
7.2
(0.3)

9.6

2007
£m

9.0
0.3

9.3

2007
£m

2.6
7.1
(0.4)

9.3

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 79

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

17 Other financial assets

Non-current
Unlisted investments

Current
Listed UK securities
Unlisted investments

18 Trade and other receivables

Non-current
Other receivables
Prepaid pension contributions (see note 21)
Prepaid leasehold premiums
Other prepayments and accrued income

Current
Trade receivables
Less: Provision for impairment of receivables

Trade receivables – net
Other receivables
Prepaid pension contributions (see note 21)
Prepaid leasehold premiums
Other prepayments and accrued income

2008
£m

3.0

43.5
5.3

48.8

2007
£m

3.0

46.2
4.7

50.9

2008
£m

2007
£m

13.5
124.0
270.1
2.4

410.0

87.9
(3.3)

84.6
32.9
76.0
10.9
103.2

307.6

1.4
–
242.8
2.8

247.0

69.0
(1.1)

67.9
51.9
–
7.6
69.3

196.7

Trade receivables that were past due but not impaired amounted to £12.6m (last year £24.1m).

19 Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents includes short-term deposits with banks and other financial institutions, with an initial maturity of 
three months or less and credit card debtors receivable within 48 hours. The carrying amount of these assets approximates 
their fair value.

The effective interest rate on short-term bank deposits is 5.4% (last year 4.9%); these deposits have an average maturity of 
26 days (last year three days).

20 Trade and other payables

Current
Trade payables
Other payables
Social security and other taxes
Pension contributions payable
Accruals and deferred income

Non-current
Accruals and deferred income1

2008
£m

2007
£m

226.9
425.5
56.1
–
268.1

976.6

259.7
327.8
49.6
40.3
366.5

1,043.9

191.2

87.6

1 Includes the fair value of the put option £52.2m (last year £nil) exercisable on 4 April 2013 (see note 27); and contingent consideration for the acquisition of COMS a.s. £4.0m 

(last year £nil) payable by April 2010 (see note 25).

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
80 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

21 Borrowings and other financial liabilities

Current
Bank loans, overdrafts and commercial paper1
Syndicated bank facility2
Finance lease liabilities

Partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme

Non-current
6.375% £375m medium term notes 20113
5.875% £400m medium term notes 20123
5.625% £400m medium term notes 20143
6.250% US$500m medium term notes 20174
7.125% US$300m medium term notes 20374
6.875% £250m puttable callable reset medium term notes 20373, 5
Finance lease liabilities

Partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme

Total

2008
£m

2007
£m

257.4
615.0
6.2

878.6
50.0

928.6

382.0
421.4
398.8
253.0
151.1
252.9
77.3

159.7
296.9
4.4

461.0
–

461.0

381.3
397.5
398.5
–
–
–
57.2

1,936.5
673.2

1,234.5
496.9

2,609.7

1,731.4

3,538.3

2,192.4

1 Bank loans, overdrafts and commercial paper includes a £5.0m (last year £5.0m) loan from the Hedge End Park Limited joint venture (see note 16).

2 Relates to a £1.2bn committed bank revolving credit facility set to mature on 26 March 2013.

3 These notes are issued under Marks and Spencer plc’s £3bn European Medium Term Note Programme and all pay interest annually.

4 Interest on these bonds is payable semi-annually.

5 These notes include an investor put and issuer call option exercisable in December 2012.

During the year the Group issued new bonds totalling £638m in both the US$ and sterling debt capital markets. On 6 December
2007 the Group issued under rule 144A of the U.S. Securities Act US$500m of notes out to 2017 and US$300m of notes out to
2037 at fixed rates of 6.250% and 7.125% respectively. These notes have been swapped back into sterling proceeds and pay
fixed sterling rates of 7.034% and 7.238% respectively. These cross currency swaps have been designated as cash flow hedges
in relation to the US$ notes.

In addition on 13 December 2007 the Group issued £250m of puttable callable reset notes at a coupon rate of 6.875%. The
Group’s right of call within these notes can be assigned which provides a discount of 0.75% per annum until December 2012,
giving a net interest rate for the first five years of 6.125%. If called at that date, these notes will continue to exist until December
2037 at an underlying rate of 4.54% plus the applicable credit spread at that time. 

At year end, the Group had a committed syndicated bank revolving credit facility of £1.2bn set to mature on 26 March 2013. 
This facility contains only one financial covenant being the ratio of earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation 
and rents payable to interest plus rents payable. In addition the Group entered into a £400m credit agreement set to expire 
on 13 February 2009 with an option to term out for a further year. This facility has the same financial covenant as the main 
£1.2bn facility. The Group also has a number of undrawn uncommitted facilities available to it. At year end, these amounted 
to £155m (last year £155m), all of which are due to be reviewed within a year. At the balance sheet date a sterling equivalent 
of £615m (last year £297m) was drawn under the committed facilities and a further £29m (last year £19m) was drawn under 
the uncommitted facilities.

Finance leases
The minimum lease payments under finance leases fall due as shown in the table opposite. It is the Group’s policy to lease certain
of its properties and equipment under finance leases. The average lease term for equipment is five years and 125 years for
property. Interest rates are fixed at the contract rate. All leases are on a fixed repayment basis and no arrangements have been
entered into for contingent payments. The Group’s obligations under finance leases are secured by the lessors’ charges over the
leased assets.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 81

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

21 Borrowings and other financial liabilities continued
Partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme
The partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme of £723.2m (last year £496.9m) relates to the amortising liability
in respect of the obligations of the Marks and Spencer Scottish Limited Partnership to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme.

Last year the Group agreed a plan with the Pension Scheme Trustee to address the majority of the deficit by transferring properties with
a current market value of £1.1bn into a partnership established by the Group. A limited interest in this partnership was contributed
to the pension scheme on 13 March 2007. The Group retains control over these properties, including the flexibility to substitute
alternative properties. The properties held in the partnership have been leased back to Marks and Spencer plc. The pension scheme
is entitled to a distribution from the profits of the partnership of £50m per annum for 15 years from July 2008. The Group has the
right to buy out the Trustee’s partnership interest at any point for an amount equal to the net present value of the remaining annual
distributions due to the pension scheme.

This year the Group has agreed to pre-fund £200.0m of its annual contribution to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme for
the next three years by increasing the value of the Scheme’s interest in the property partnership. To meet this £200.0m contribution
of value, the Group has placed additional properties into the partnership with a current market value of approximately £400.0m.
These properties have been leased back to Marks and Spencer plc and the fixed annual distribution made out of partnership
profits to the pension scheme will be increased by approximately £21.9m for the remaining 14 year period.

Each year the total obligation will reduce as payments are made to the pension scheme by the partnership and an interest charge
will be taken to the income statement representing the unwinding of the discounted obligation at an implied average interest rate
of 5.7% (last year 5.3%). The fair value of this liability was £706.6m (last year £495.3m).

Maturity of borrowings and other financial liabilities
The contractual maturity of the Group’s non-derivative financial liabilities and derivatives is as follows:

Bank loans,
overdrafts and 
commercial

paper bank facility
£m

Syndicated Medium term
notes
£m

£m

Partnership
liability to
Finance the M&S UK
Pension
Scheme
£m

lease
liabilities
£m

Total
£m

Derivative
assets
£m

Derivative
liabilities
£m

Timing of cash flows
Within one year
Between one and two years
Between two and five years
More than five years

(159.7)
–
–
–

(296.9)
–
–
–

(69.9)
(69.9)
(584.7)
(868.5)

(7.1)
(8.2)
(11.3)
(196.0)

–
(50.0)
(200.0)
(500.0)

(533.6)
(128.1)
(796.0)
(1,564.5)

(159.7)

(296.9)

(1,593.0)

(222.6)

(750.0)

(3,022.2)

558.5
18.5
–
–

577.0

(564.6)
(18.6)
–
–

(583.2)

Effect of discounting

At 31 March 2007

–

–

415.7

161.0

253.1

829.8 

(159.7)

(296.9)

(1,177.3)

(61.6)

(496.9)

(2,192.4)

Total
£m

(6.1)
(0.1)
–
–

(6.2)

Timing of cash flows
Within one year
Between one and two years
Between two and five years
More than five years

(257.4)
–
–
–

(112.6)
(615.0)
–
(112.6)
– (1,088.9)
– (1,866.5)

(11.6)
(19.2)
(26.2)
(214.9)

(50.0) (1,046.6)
(203.7)
(71.9)
(215.7) (1,330.8)
(719.0) (2,800.4)

643.4
90.7
84.8
747.3

(663.7)
(90.9)
(83.0)
(736.4)

(257.4)

(615.0) (3,180.6)

(271.9) (1,056.6) (5,381.5) 1,566.2 (1,574.0)

(20.3)
(0.2)
1.8
10.9

(7.8)

Effect of discounting

At 29 March 2008

–

– 1,321.4

188.4

333.4 1,843.2 

(257.4)

(615.0) (1,859.2)

(83.5)

(723.2) (3,538.3)

This table does not include trade and other payables (see note 20).

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
82 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

21 Borrowings and other financial liabilities continued
Financial liabilities
After taking into account the hedging derivatives entered into by the Group, the currency and interest rate exposure of the Group’s
financial liabilities is as set out below excluding short-term payables and the COMS a.s. put option:

Currency
Sterling
Euro
Hong Kong dollar

Fixed
rate
£m

Floating
rate
£m

2008

Total
£m

Fixed
rate
£m

2,665.9
–
–

2,665.9

673.0
192.5
6.9

872.4

3,338.9
192.5
6.9

1,735.8
–
–

3,538.3

1,735.8

Floating
rate
£m

289.7
159.5
7.4

456.6

2007

Total
£m

2,025.5
159.5
7.4

2,192.4

The floating rate sterling and euro borrowings are linked to interest rates related to LIBOR. These rates are for periods between
one and three months. As at the balance sheet date and excluding finance leases but including the partnership liability, the fixed
rate sterling borrowings are at an average rate of 6.0% (last year 5.8%) and the weighted average time for which the rate is fixed 
is 10 years (last year 8.5 years).

Interest rate analysis
The effective interest rates at the balance sheet date were as follows:

Committed and uncommitted borrowings
Medium term notes
Finance leases
Partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme

2008
%

5.5
6.2
5.0
5.7

2007
%

4.8
5.9
4.4
5.3

22 Financial instruments
Treasury policy and financial risk management
The Group operates a centralised Group treasury function to manage the Group’s funding requirements and financial risks in line
with the Board approved treasury policies and procedures, and their delegated authorities. 

The Group’s financial instruments, other than derivatives, comprise borrowings, cash and liquid resources and various items, such
as trade debtors and trade creditors, that arise directly from its operations. The main purpose of these financial instruments is to
raise finance for the Group’s operations.

Group treasury also enters into derivative transactions, principally interest rate and currency swaps and forward currency contracts.
The purpose of these transactions is to manage the interest rate and currency risks arising from the Group’s operations and financing.

It remains the Group’s policy not to hold or issue financial instruments for trading purposes, except where financial constraints
necessitate the need to liquidate any outstanding investments. The treasury function is managed as a cost centre and does 
not engage in speculative trading.

The principal financial risks faced by the Group are liquidity/funding, interest rate, foreign currency and counterparty risks. 
The policies and strategies for managing these risks are summarised as follows:

A Liquidity/funding risk
The Group’s funding strategy is to ensure a mix of funding sources offering flexibility and cost effectiveness to match the
requirements of the Group. Operating subsidiaries are financed by a combination of retained profits, bank borrowings, 
medium term notes and committed syndicated bank facilities. In addition to the existing borrowings, the Group has a Euro
Medium Term Note programme of £3bn, of which £1.5bn (last year £1.2bn) was in issuance as at the balance sheet date. 
Short-term borrowings are backed by a £1.2bn five-year committed syndicated bank facility, of which £615.0m (last year
£296.9m) was drawn down at the balance sheet date. In addition the Group entered into a £400m credit agreement set 
to expire on 13 February 2009 with an option to term out for a further year.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 83

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

22 Financial instruments continued
B Interest rate risk
The Group is exposed to interest rate risk in relation to the sterling, US$, euro and Hong Kong dollar variable rate financial 
assets and liabilities. The Group’s policy is to use derivative contracts where necessary to maintain a mix of fixed and floating 
rate borrowings to manage this risk. The structure and maturity of these derivatives correspond to the underlying borrowings 
and are accounted for as fair value or cash flow hedges as appropriate.

At the balance sheet date, fixed rate borrowings amounted to £2,665.8m (last year £1,735.8m) representing the public bond
issues and finance leases, and amounting to 75% (last year 79%) of the Group’s gross borrowings.

C Foreign currency risk
Transactional foreign currency exposures arise from both the export of goods from the UK to overseas subsidiaries, and from 
the import of materials and goods directly sourced from overseas suppliers. Group treasury hedge these exposures principally
using forward foreign exchange contracts progressively covering up to 100% out to 18 months. Where appropriate hedge cover
can be taken out longer than 18 months with Board approval. The Group is primarily exposed to foreign exchange in relation to
sterling against movements in US$ and euro. 

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

Forward foreign exchange contracts in relation to the Group’s forecast currency requirements are designated as cash flow 
hedges with fair value movements recognised directly in equity. To the extent that these hedges cover actual currency payables 
or receivables then associated fair value movements previously recognised in equity are recorded in the income statement in
conjunction with the corresponding asset or liability. As at the balance sheet date the gross notional value in sterling terms of
forward foreign exchange sell or buy contracts amounted to £619m (last year £456m) with a weighted average maturity date 
of seven months (last year six months).

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

The Group does not use derivatives to hedge balance sheet and profit and loss translation exposures. However, the translation
exposures arising on the overseas net assets are hedged with foreign currency debt. As at the balance sheet date, €243m 
(last year €234m) and HK$107m (last year HK$113m) currency debt was hedging overseas net assets.

The Group also hedges foreign currency intercompany loans where these exist. Forward foreign exchange contracts in relation 
to the hedging of the Group’s foreign currency intercompany loans are designated as held for trading with fair value movements
being recognised in the income statement. The corresponding fair value movement of the intercompany loan balance results 
in an overall £nil impact on the income statement. As at the balance sheet date, the gross notional value of intercompany loan
hedges was £80m (last year £128m).

Gains and losses in equity on forward foreign exchange contracts as of 31 March 2008 will be released to the income statement
at various dates over the following 19 months (last year 14 months) from the balance sheet date.

D Counterparty risk
Counterparty risk exists where the Group can suffer financial loss through default or non-performance by financial institutions.
Exposures are managed through the Group treasury policy which limits the value that can be placed with each approved counterparty
to minimise the risk of loss. The counterparties are limited to the approved institutions with secure long-term credit ratings of A+/A1
or better assigned by Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s respectively. Limits are reviewed regularly by senior management. The credit
risk of these financial instruments is estimated as the fair value of the assets resulting from the contracts.

The Group has very low retail credit risk due to transactions being principally of a high volume, low value and short maturity. 

The Group does not have any material exposures to concentrations of credit risk with any one counterparty.

The maximum exposure to credit risk at the balance sheet date was as follows: trade receivables £85m (last year £68m), other
receivables £46m (last year £53m), cash and cash equivalents £318m (last year £180m) and derivatives £37m (last year £2m).

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
84 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

22 Financial instruments continued
E Sensitivity analysis
The table below illustrates the estimated impact on the income statement and equity as a result of market movements in foreign
exchange and interest rates in relation to all of the Group’s financial instruments. The Group considers that a 1% +/- movement in
interest rates and a 10% weakening or strengthening in sterling represents reasonable possible changes. However, this analysis is
for illustrative purposes only. 

The impact in the income statement due to changes in interest rates reflects the effect on the Group’s floating rate debt as at 
the balance sheet date. The impact in equity reflects the fair value movement in relation to the Group’s cross currency swaps. 
The impact from foreign exchange movements reflects the change in the fair value of the Group’s transactional foreign exchange
cash flow hedges and the net investment hedges at the balance sheet date. 

The equity impact shown for foreign exchange sensitivity relates to derivative and non-derivative financial instruments hedging 
net investments. This value is expected to be fully offset by the retranslation of the hedged foreign currency net assets leaving 
a net equity impact of zero. The table excludes financial instruments that expose the Group to interest rate and foreign exchange
risk where such risk is fully hedged with another financial instrument. Also excluded are trade receivables and payables, and the
COMS a.s. put option. 

At 31 March 2007
Impact on income statement: gain/(loss)
Impact on equity: gain/(loss)

At 29 March 2008
Impact on income statement: gain/(loss)
Impact on equity: gain/(loss)

Derivative financial instruments

Current
Options – held for trading
Forward foreign exchange contracts – cash flow hedges

– held for trading

Non-current
Cross currency – cash flow hedges
Forward foreign exchange contracts – cash flow hedges

1% 
decrease in
interest rates 
£m

1% 
increase in
interest rates
£m

10% 
weakening
in sterling
£m

10% 
strengthening
in sterling
£m

3.2
–

6.5
4.1

–
(8.0)

–
(15.5)

(3.2)
–

(6.5)
3.3

2008

Assets
£m

Liabilities
£m

Assets
£m

12.4
5.0
1.0

18.4

16.9
1.3

18.2

(12.4)
(21.8)
(0.9)

(35.1)

–
–

–

–
1.4
1.0

2.4

–
–

–

–
6.6

–
12.7

2007

Liabilities
£m

–
(8.3)
–

(8.3)

–
(0.2)

(0.2)

During the year, the Group held a number of cross currency swaps to redesignate fixed rate US$ debt to fixed rate sterling debt.
The attributes of these derivatives matched the characteristics of the underlying debt hedged. The amounts reported as options
held for trading in derivative assets and liabilities represent the fair value of the call option with the puttable callable reset notes
mirrored by the fair value of the sold option to have this call assigned.

Fair value of financial instruments
With the exception of the Group’s fixed rate bond debt and the partnership liability (see note 21), there were no material differences
between the carrying value of non-derivative financial assets and financial liabilities and their fair values as at the balance sheet date.

The carrying value of the Group’s fixed rate bond debt was £1,859.2m (last year £1,177.3m), the fair value of this debt was
£1,740.7m (last year £1,162.9m).

Capital policy 
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern in order to
provide returns for shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders and to maintain a capital structure that optimises the cost 
of capital. In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure the Group may adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders,
return capital to shareholders, issue new shares or sell assets to reduce debt. 

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 85

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

23 Provisions

At 2 April 2006
Provided in the year
Released in the year
Utilised during the year
Exchange differences

At 31 March 2007

At 1 April 2007
Provided in the year
Released in the year
Utilised during the year
Exchange differences

At 29 March 2008

Analysis of total provisions:

Current
Non-current

Total provisions

UK
restructuring
£m

Overseas
restructuring
£m

19.3
2.0
(1.1)
(6.1)
–

14.1

14.1
11.5
(3.2)
(4.2)
–

18.2

9.0
–
–
(0.5)
(0.1)

8.4

8.4
0.1
(2.0)
(0.3)
1.3

7.5

2008
£m

11.1
14.6

25.7

Total
£m

28.3
2.0
(1.1)
(6.6)
(0.1)

22.5

22.5
11.6
(5.2)
(4.5)
1.3

25.7

2007
£m

5.7
16.8

22.5

The provision for UK restructuring primarily relates to costs of closing Lifestore, restructuring of the Direct operation and head
office restructuring.

The provision for overseas restructuring costs primarily relates to future closure costs in respect of discontinued operations 
in Continental Europe.

The non-current provisions relate to closure costs of discontinued operations in Continental Europe, the closure of Lifestore
operations and the restructuring of the Direct operation and are expected to be utilised over a period of 10 years.

24 Deferred tax
Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences under the liability method using a tax rate of 28% (last year 30%) for 
UK differences and the local tax rates for overseas differences.

The movements in deferred tax assets and liabilities (after the offsetting of balances within the same jurisdiction as permitted 
by IAS 12 – ‘Income Taxes’) during the period are shown below. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are only offset where there 
is a legally enforceable right of offset and there is an intention to settle the balances net.

Deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

At 2 April 2006
Credited/(charged) to the income statement
Credited/(charged) to equity

At 31 March 2007

At 1 April 2007
Credited/(charged) to the income statement
Credited/(charged) to equity

At 29 March 2008

Fixed
assets
temporary
differences
£m

Accelerated
capital
allowances
£m

Pension
temporary
differences
£m

Other
short-term
temporary
differences
£m

(95.0)
4.4
–

(90.6)

(90.6)
13.7
–

(76.9)

(85.0)
(18.2)
–

(103.2)

(103.2)
(41.4)
–

(144.6)

251.5
(71.4)
3.4

183.5

183.5
(150.5)
(172.4)

(139.4)

12.4
(12.5)
22.0

21.9

21.9
(12.9)
(15.1)

(6.1)

Total UK
deferred
tax
£m

83.9
(97.7)
25.4

11.6

11.6
(191.1)
(187.5)

(367.0)

Overseas
deferred
tax
£m

(6.1)
(0.3)
(0.9)

(7.3)

(7.3)
0.4
1.8

(5.1)

Total
£m

77.8
(98.0)
24.5

4.3

4.3
(190.7)
(185.7)

(372.1)

In arriving at the deferred tax on fixed assets, credit has been taken for capital losses with a tax value of £53.0m (last year
£57.0m). No deferred tax is recognised on the unremitted earnings of overseas subsidiaries. As the earnings are continually
reinvested by the Group, no tax is expected to be payable on them in the foreseeable future. Undistributed profits of overseas
subsidiaries amount to £295.1m (last year £226.7m).

The Group is claiming UK tax relief for losses incurred by some of its current and former European subsidiaries. In the light 
of continuing litigation, no asset has been recognised in respect of these claims. 

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
86 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

25 Acquisitions

Book values
Net assets at fair value (100%)

Net assets acquired

Cash consideration
Contingent consideration
Transaction costs

Total consideration

Goodwill arising on acquisition

Marinopoulos
B.V.
£m

COMS a.s.
£m

9.2
9.2

4.6 

38.1
–
0.8

38.9

34.3

2.6
2.6

1.3

10.6
4.0
0.8

15.4

14.1

Total
£m

11.8
11.8

5.9

48.7
4.0
1.6

54.3

48.4

Marinopoulos B.V.
On 28 February 2008, the Group acquired Board control and 50% of the issued share capital of Marks and Spencer
Marinopoulos B.V. for cash consideration of €50.0m and transaction costs of £0.8m. The Marinopoulos group, located in 
Greece, Bulgaria, Croatia, Romania, Switzerland and Serbia, was previously a franchise partner of the Group and is a retailer 
of general merchandise and food. The fair values currently established for the acquisition are provisional due to the proximity 
of the date of acquisition to the Group’s reporting date. The acquisition has contributed £4.8m to sales and a £0.4m loss to
operating profit in the period since the acquisition. If the acquisition of the Marinopoulos group had been completed on the first 
day of the financial year, Group sales for the year would have been £9,052m and Group profits attributable to equity holders 
of the Company would have been £824m.

COMS a.s.
On 20 March 2008, the Group acquired 51% of the issued share capital of COMS a.s. for cash consideration of €13.6m and
transaction costs of £0.8m. The COMS group, located in the Czech Republic, Latvia, Lithuania and Slovakia, was previously 
a franchise partner of the Group and is a retailer of general merchandise and food. The fair values currently established for 
the acquisition are provisional due to the proximity of the date of acquisition to the Group’s reporting date. The acquisition has
contributed £nil to sales and £nil to operating profit in the period since acquisition. If the acquisition of the COMS group had been
completed on the first day of the financial year, Group sales for the year would have been £9,034m and Group profits attributable
to equity holders of the Company would have been £822m. The sale and purchase agreement includes call and put options 
over the remaining 49% of the share capital of COMS a.s. exercisable in five years time. The fair value of the put option (£52.2m)
has been recognised as a liability at 29 March 2008 (note 20 and note 27). On an undiscounted basis this liability has a value 
of £81.0m. 

Goodwill has arisen on the acquisitions of Marks and Spencer Marinopoulos B.V. and COMS a.s. due to the opportunities to
facilitate a faster rate of growth and greater operating efficiency that do not meet the criteria for recognition as an intangible 
asset at the date of acquisition.

26 Share capital

Shares

2008

£m

Shares

2007

£m

Authorised ordinary shares of 25p each

3,200,000,000

800.0

3,200,000,000

800.0

Allotted, called-up and fully paid ordinary shares of 25p each
At start of year
Shares issued on exercise of share options
Shares purchased in buy back

At end of year

1,699,773,100
12,447,224
(125,741,901)

424.9
3.1
(31.4)

1,682,437,014
17,336,086
–

1,586,478,423

396.6

1,699,773,100

420.6
4.3
–

424.9

Issue of new shares
12,447,224 (last year 17,336,086) ordinary shares having a nominal value of £3.1m (last year £4.3m) were allotted during the year
under the terms of the Company’s schemes which are described in note 12. The aggregate consideration received was £31.6m
(last year £44.9m).

Share buy back
125,741,901 (last year nil) ordinary shares having a nominal value of £31.4m (last year £nil) were bought back and subsequently
cancelled during the year in accordance with the authority granted by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting in July 2007.
The aggregate consideration paid was £555.9m (last year £nil).

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 87

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

27 Statement of changes in shareholders’ equity

At 2 April 2006
Profit for the year attributable to shareholders
Dividends
Foreign currency translation
Shares issued on exercise of employee share options
Redemption of B shares
Purchase of own shares held by employee trust
Purchase of call option for Company’s shares
Actuarial loss on retirement benefit deficit
Deferred tax on retirement benefit deficit
Deferred tax on share schemes
Charge for share-based payments
Cash flow and net investment hedges
– losses deferred in equity
– recycled and reported in net profit
– amount recognised in inventories
– tax on fair value gains

Ordinary
share
capital
£m

420.6
–
–
–
4.3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

Share
premium
account
£m

Capital
redemption
reserve
£m

Hedging
reserve
£m

Other
reserve1
£m

Retained
earnings2, 3

£m

162.3
–
–
–
40.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

2,113.8
–
–
–
–
54.7
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

(8.0)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

(7.4)
10.7
2.1
(1.8)

(6,542.2)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

5,057.2
659.9
(260.6)
(14.0)
–
(54.7)
(18.4)
(17.3)
(8.6)
4.0
22.3
27.3

–
–
–
–

Total
£m

1,203.7
659.9
(260.6)
(14.0)
44.9
–
(18.4)
(17.3)
(8.6)
4.0
22.3
27.3

(7.4)
10.7
2.1
(1.8)

At 31 March 2007

424.9

202.9

2,168.5

(4.4)

(6,542.2)

5,397.1

1,646.8

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

At 1 April 2007
Profit for the year attributable to shareholders
Dividends
Foreign currency translation
Shares issued on exercise of employee share 

options

Shares purchased in buy back
Purchase of own shares held by employee trust
Put option for acquisition of minority interest4
Actuarial gain on retirement benefit asset
Deferred tax on retirement benefit asset
Deferred tax on share schemes
Charge for share-based payments
Cash flow and net investment hedges
– losses deferred in equity
– recycled and reported in net profit5
– amount recognised in inventories
– tax on fair value gains

424.9
–
–
–

3.1
(31.4)
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

202.9
–
–
–

2,168.5
–
–
–

(4.4)
–
–
–

(6,542.2)
–
–
–

5,397.1
821.7
(343.6)
21.3

1,646.8
821.7
(343.6)
21.3

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

28.5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–
31.4
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

(33.5)
1.3
2.4
(2.7)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–
(555.9)
(31.9)
(52.2)
605.4
(172.4)
(10.6)
29.0

–
–
–
–

31.6
(555.9)
(31.9)
(52.2)
605.4
(172.4)
(10.6)
29.0

(33.5)
1.3
2.4
(2.7)

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

At 29 March 2008

396.6

231.4

2,199.9

(36.9)

(6,542.2)

5,707.9

1,956.7

1 The ‘Other reserve’ was created as part of the capital restructuring that took place in 2002. It represents the difference between the nominal value of the shares issued prior to 

the capital reduction by the Company (being the carrying value of the investment in Marks and Spencer plc) and the share capital, share premium and capital redemption reserve
of Marks and Spencer plc at the date of the transaction.

2 Cumulative goodwill of £nil (last year £nil) arising on the acquisition of subsidiaries has been written off against retained earnings.

3 Includes a cumulative £18.4m gain (last year £2.9m loss) in the currency reserve.

4 Fair value of the put option over the 49% minority interest in the share capital of COMS a.s.

5 Amounts recycled and reported in net profit have all been recorded in cost of sales.

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
88 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

28 Contingencies and commitments
A Capital commitments

Commitments in respect of properties in the course of construction

2008
£m

2007
£m

182.8

265.8

B Other material contracts
In the event of a material change in the trading arrangements with certain warehouse operators, the Group has a commitment 
to purchase property, plant and equipment, at values ranging from historical net book value to market value, which are currently
owned and operated by them on the Group’s behalf.

C Commitments under operating leases
The Group leases various stores, offices, warehouses and equipment under non-cancellable operating lease agreements. 
The leases have varying terms, escalation clauses and renewal rights.

Total future minimum rentals under non-cancellable operating leases expiring:
Not later than one year
Later than one year and not later than five years
Later than five years and not later than 25 years
Later than 25 years

Total

The total future sublease payments to be received are £70.5m (last year £68.8m).

29 Analysis of cash flows given in the cash flow statement
A Cash flows from operating activities – continuing

Profit on ordinary activities after taxation
Income tax expense
Interest payable and similar charges
Interest receivable

Operating profit
Increase in inventories
(Increase)/decrease in receivables
Payments to acquire leasehold properties
(Decrease)/increase in payables
Exceptional operating cash outflow (see note 29F)
Depreciation and amortisation
Share-based payments
Profit on property disposals
Exceptional pension credit

Cash generated from operations – continuing

B Cash flows from operating activities – discontinued
Last year £0.7m cash was generated from the discontinued operations of Kings Super Markets Inc.

2008
£m

2007
£m

17.9
90.4
2,223.6
1,492.4

10.6
57.4
1,778.3
1,527.6

3,824.3

3,373.9

52 weeks
ended
29 March
2008
£m

821.0
308.1
146.6
(64.4)

1,211.3
(54.4)
(33.5)
(47.6)
(61.9)
(2.5)
317.6
29.0
(27.0)
(95.0)

52 weeks
ended
31 March
2007
£m

659.2
277.5
143.0
(33.8)

1,045.9
(42.8)
12.5
(13.5)
136.6
(4.2)
282.7
27.3
(1.9)
–

1,236.0

1,442.6

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 89

29 Analysis of cash flows given in the cash flow statement continued
C Capital expenditure and financial investment

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Purchase of property, plant and equipment
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
Purchase of intangible fixed assets
Sale of non-current financial assets
Sale/(purchase) of current financial assets

D Other debt financing

Cash inflow from borrowings
Drawdown of syndicated bank facility
Redemption of securitised loan notes
Redemption of medium term notes
Issue of medium term notes
Decrease in obligations under finance leases
Redemption of B shares

E Other equity financing

Shares issued on exercise of employee share options
Shares purchased in buy back
Purchase of own shares held by employee trust
Purchase of call option for Company’s shares

F Exceptional operating cash flows

UK restructuring costs
Closure of Lifestore
Closure of European operations

52 weeks
ended
29 March
2008
£m

(958.4)
91.6
(60.6)
–
2.8

(924.6)

8.7
317.6
–
–
631.7
(3.5)
–

954.5

31.6
(555.9)
(31.9)
–

(556.2)

(2.2)
–
(0.3)

(2.5)

52 weeks
ended
31 March
2007
£m

(666.9)
2.9
(46.5)
0.3
(2.6)

(712.8)

21.6
296.4
(319.6)
(818.2)
397.5
(2.2)
(54.7)

(479.2)

44.9
–
(18.4)
(17.3)

9.2

(2.8)
(0.7)
(0.7)

(4.2)

Additions to property, plant and equipment during the year amounting to £23.5m (last year £13.6m) were financed by new 
finance leases.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
90 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Notes to the financial statements

continued

30 Analysis of net debt
A Reconciliation of movement in net debt

Net cash
Bank loans (see note 21)
Less: amounts treated as financing (see below)

Cash and cash equivalents (see note 19)

Net cash per cash flow statement

Current financial assets (see note 17)

Debt financing
Bank loans, overdrafts and commercial paper 

treated as financing (see above)
Syndicated bank facility (see note 21)
Medium term notes (see note 21)
Finance lease liabilities (see note 21)
Partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer 

UK Pension Scheme (see note 21)

Debt financing

Net debt

B Reconciliation of net debt to balance sheet

At
1 April
2007
£m

(456.1)
323.0

(133.1)
180.1

47.0

50.9

(26.6)
(296.4)
(1,167.2)
(61.6)

(495.6)

(2,047.4)

(1,949.5)

Cash flow
£m

Acquisitions
£m

Exchange
and other
non-cash
movements
£m

At
29 March
2008
£m

(393.3)
326.3

(67.0)
132.5

65.5

(2.8)

(8.7)
(317.6)
(631.7)
3.5

–

(954.5)

(891.8)

(22.0)
22.0

–
3.9

3.9

–

(22.0)
–
–
(7.6)

–
–

–
1.5

1.5

0.7

(871.4)
671.3

(200.1)
318.0

117.9

48.8

–
–
(13.3)
(17.8)

(57.3)
(614.0)
(1,812.2)
(83.5)

–

(199.0)

(694.6)

(29.6)

(25.7)

(230.1)

(3,261.6)

(227.9)

(3,094.9)

Balance sheet and related notes
Cash and cash equivalents
Current financial assets (see note 17)
Bank loans, overdrafts and commercial paper (see note 21)
Syndicated bank facility (see note 21)
Medium term notes (see note 21)
Finance lease liabilities (see note 21)
Partnership liability to the Marks & Spencer UK Pension Scheme (see note 21)

Interest payable included within related borrowing

Total net debt

2008
£m

2007
£m

318.0
48.8
(257.4)
(615.0)
(1,859.2)
(83.5)
(723.2)

(3,171.5)
76.6

180.1
50.9
(159.7)
(296.9)
(1,177.3)
(61.6)
(496.9)

(1,961.4)
11.9

(3,094.9)

(1,949.5)

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 91

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

31 Foreign exchange rates

Euro
US dollar
Hong Kong dollar

Weighted average sales rate

Weighted average profit rate

Balance sheet rate

2008

1.40
2.01
15.62

2007

1.48
1.88
14.77

2008

1.41
2.01
15.61

2007

1.47
1.88
14.77

2008

1.26
1.99
15.52

2007

1.47
1.96
15.31

32 Related party transactions
A Subsidiaries
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation and 
are not disclosed in this note. Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries are disclosed in the Company’s separate
financial statements.

B Hedge End joint venture
A loan of £5.0m was received from the joint venture on 9 October 2002. It is repayable on five business days’ notice and 
was renewed on 1 January 2008. Interest was charged on the loan at 5.25% until 31 December 2007 and 5.5% thereafter.

C Marks & Spencer Pension Scheme
Details of other transactions and balances held with the Marks & Spencer Pension Scheme are set out in note 11.

D Key management compensation

Salaries and short-term benefits
Post-employment benefits
Termination benefits
Share-based payments

Total

2008
£m

8.1
0.4
0.4
12.3

21.2

2007
£m

9.6
0.4
–
6.7

16.7

Key management includes the Directors, the Group Secretary and only those members of key management who are members of
the Executive Committee. Further information about the remuneration of individual directors is provided in the Remuneration report.

During the year, key management have purchased goods at the Group’s usual prices less a 20% discount. This discount is
available to all staff employed directly by the Group in the UK.

E Other related party transactions
Supplier transactions occurred during the year between the Group and a company controlled by a close family member of 
Kate Bostock, who became a director during the year. These transactions amounted to £5.4m during the year (last year £5.2m)
with an outstanding trade payable of £0.1m at 29 March 2008 (last year £0.2m). The company was a supplier prior to Kate’s
employment by the Group.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
92 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Company income statement

Other operating income

Operating profit
Income from shares in Group undertakings
Finance costs

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

Company balance sheet

Assets
Non-current assets
Investments in Group undertakings
Current assets
Trade and other receivables

Total assets

Liabilities
Current liabilities
Amounts owed to Group undertakings
Trade and other payables

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity
Called-up share capital – equity
Share premium account
Capital redemption reserve
Merger reserve
Retained earnings

Total equity

52 weeks
ended
29 March
2008
£m

0.1

0.1
344.0
–

344.1

52 weeks
ended
31 March
2007
£m

–

–
260.6
(0.2)

260.4

Notes

C2, C3

C4

Notes

2008
£m

2007
(restated)
£m

C6

9,147.4

9,135.6

0.2

0.1

9,147.6

9,135.7

2,584.6
1.0

2,060.8
0.9

2,585.6

2,061.7

6,562.0

7,074.0

C7

C7

C7

C7

396.6
231.4
2,199.9
1,397.3
2,336.8

424.9
202.9
2,168.5
1,397.3
2,880.4

6,562.0

7,074.0

The financial statements were approved by the Board and authorised for issue on 19 May 2008. The financial statements also
comprise the notes on pages 94 and 95.

Sir Stuart Rose, Chief Executive
Ian Dyson, Group Finance and Operations Director

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 93

Company statement of changes 
in shareholders’ equity

Profit attributable to shareholders
Dividends

Capital contribution for share-based payments
Shares purchased in buy back
Shares issued on the exercise of employee share options

Change in shareholders’ equity

Opening shareholders’ equity as previously reported
Prior year adjustment (see note C7)

Opening shareholders’ equity

Closing shareholders’ equity

Company cash flow statement

Cash flows from operating activities
Cash generated from operations

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Dividends received

Net cash inflow from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Interest paid
Shares purchased in buy back
Redemption of non-equity B shares
Shares issued on exercise of employee share options
Drawdown of intercompany loan
Equity dividends paid

Net cash outflow from financing activities

Net cash inflow from activities
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning and end of year

52 weeks
ended
29 March
2008
£m

344.1
(343.6)

0.5
11.8
(555.9)
31.6

(512.0)

52 weeks
ended
31 March
2007
£m

260.4
(260.6)

(0.2)
13.3
–
44.9

58.0

6,984.5
89.5

6,939.8
76.2

7,074.0

7,016.0

6,562.0

7,074.0

52 weeks
ended
29 March
2008
£m

52 weeks
ended
31 March
2007
£m

0.1

0.1

0.9

0.9

344.0

344.0

260.6

260.6

–
(555.9)
–
31.6
523.8
(343.6)

(344.1)

–
–

(0.2)
–
(54.7)
44.9
9.1
(260.6)

(261.5)

–
–

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
94 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Company notes to the financial statements

C1 Accounting policies
The Company’s accounting policies are the same as those set out in note 1 of the Group financial statements, except as 
noted below.

Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less, where appropriate, provisions for impairment.

C2 Employees
The Company had no employees during the current or prior year. Directors received emoluments in respect of their services to 
the Company during the year of £822,000 (last year £751,000). The Company did not operate any pension schemes during the
current or preceding year.

C3 Auditors’ remuneration
Auditors’ remuneration in respect of the Company’s annual audit has been borne by its subsidiary Marks and Spencer plc and 
has been disclosed on a consolidated basis in the Company’s consolidated financial statements as required by section 227A 
of the Companies Act 1985.

C4 Finance costs
Dividends of £nil (last year £0.2m) were paid in respect of non-equity B shares.

C5 Dividends

Dividends on equity ordinary shares
Paid final dividend
Paid interim dividend

2008
per share

2007
per share

2008
£m

2007
£m

12.0p
8.3p

20.3p

9.2p
6.3p

15.5p

203.5
140.1

343.6

154.6
106.0

260.6

In addition, the directors have proposed a final dividend in respect of the year ended 31 March 2008 of 14.2p per share amounting
to a dividend of £217.9m. It will be paid on 11 July 2008 to shareholders who are on the Register of Members on 30 May 2008. 
In line with the requirements of IAS 10 – ‘Events after the Balance Sheet Date’, this dividend has not been recognised within 
these results.

C6 Investments
A Investments in Group undertakings

Beginning of the year as previously reported
Prior year adjustment (see note C7)
Beginning of the year restated
Additional investment in subsidiary

End of year

Shares in Group undertakings represent the Company’s investment in Marks and Spencer plc.

2008
£m

9,046.1
89.5
9,135.6
11.8

2007
£m

9,046.1
76.2
9,122.3
13.3

9,147.4

9,135.6

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 95

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

B Principal subsidiary undertakings
The Company’s principal subsidiary undertakings are set out below. A schedule of interests in all undertakings is filed with the
Annual Return.

Marks and Spencer plc
Marks and Spencer International Holdings Limited
Marks and Spencer (Nederland) BV
Marks and Spencer Marinopoulos BV
Marks and Spencer (Ireland) Limited
Marks and Spencer (Asia Pacific) Limited
Marks and Spencer Simply Foods Limited
Marks and Spencer Marinopoulos Greece SA
M.S. Insurance L.P.
Marks and Spencer Investments Limited
St Michael Finance plc
Marks and Spencer Finance plc
Marks and Spencer Chester Limited
Marks and Spencer SCM Limited
Per Una Group Limited
Marks and Spencer Scottish Limited Partnership

1 Marks and Spencer plc is a general partner.

Principal activity

Retailing
Holding Company
Holding Company
Holding Company
Retailing
Retailing
Retailing
Retailing
Financial Services
Finance
Finance
Finance
Property Investment
Procurement
Procurement
Property Investment

Country of incorporation
and operation

Great Britain
Great Britain
The Netherlands
The Netherlands
Republic of Ireland
Hong Kong
Great Britain
Greece
Guernsey
Great Britain
Great Britain
Great Britain
Great Britain
Great Britain
Great Britain
Great Britain

Proportion of voting rights
and shares held by:

Company

A subsidiary

100%
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
100%
100%
50%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
–1

The Company has taken advantage of the exemption under section 231(5) of the Companies Act 1985 by providing information
only in relation to subsidiary undertakings whose results or financial position, in the opinion of the directors, principally affected 
the financial statements.

C7 Statement of changes in shareholders’ equity

At 2 April 2006 as previously reported
Prior year adjustment
At 2 April 2006 restated
Profit for the year attributable to shareholders
Dividends
Capital contribution for share-based payments
Shares issued on exercise of employee share options 

(see note 12)

Redemption of B shares

At 31 March 2007

At 1 April 2007
Profit for the year attributable to shareholders
Dividends
Capital contribution for share-based payments
Shares purchased in buy back
Shares issued on exercise of employee share options 

(see note 12)

At 29 March 2008

Ordinary
share
capital
£m

420.6
–
420.6
–
–
–

4.3
–

Share
premium
account
£m

162.3
–
162.3
–
–
–

40.6
–

Capital
redemption
reserve
£m

2,113.8
–
2,113.8
–
–
–

–
54.7

Merger
reserve
£m

1,397.3
–
1,397.3
–
–
–

Retained
earnings
£m

2,845.8
76.2
2,922.0
260.4
(260.6)
13.3

Total
£m

6,939.8
76.2
7,016.0
260.4
(260.6)
13.3

–
–

–
(54.7)

44.9
–

424.9

202.9

2,168.5

1,397.3

2,880.4

7,074.0

424.9
–
–
–
(31.4)

3.1

396.6

202.9
–
–
–
–

28.5

2,168.5
–
–
–
31.4

1,397.3
–
–
–
–

2,880.4
344.1
(343.6)
11.8
(555.9)

7,074.0
344.1
(343.6)
11.8
(555.9)

–

–

–

31.6

231.4

2,199.9

1,397.3

2,336.8

6,562.0

Prior year adjustment
Following the implementation of IFRIC 11 – ‘IFRS 2 – Group and Treasury Share Transactions’, the opening balance sheet 
at 2 April 2006 has been restated to recognise £76.2m of capital contribution to the subsidiary in respect of equity-settled 
share-based payment transactions.

C8 Related party transactions
During the year, the Company has received dividends from Marks and Spencer plc of £344.0m (last year £260.6m) and 
has increased its loan from Marks and Spencer plc by £523.8m (last year £9.1m). The outstanding balance was £2,584.6m 
(last year £2,060.8m). There were no other related party transactions.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
96 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Group financial record

The figures for 2005 to 2008 are prepared under IFRS. The figures for 2004 are UK GAAP figures presented in the same format 
as the 2005 to 2008 figures.

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation – continuing operations

1,129.1

Income statement
Revenue – continuing operations

Operating profit – continuing operations
UK Retail
International Retail

Total operating profit

Net interest payable
Pension finance income/(charge)

Analysed between:
Before property disposals and exceptional items
Profit/(loss) on property disposals
Exceptional pension credit
Exceptional finance costs
Exceptional operating costs

Income tax expense

Profit after taxation
Profit from discontinued operations
Minority interests

Profit attributable to shareholders

Balance sheet
Non-current assets
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment (including investment properties)
Joint venture and other financial assets
Retirement benefit asset
Trade and other receivables
Deferred tax assets

Non-current assets
Current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Retirement benefit deficit
Other non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

IFRS
2008
52 weeks
£m

IFRS
2007
52 weeks
£m

IFRS
2006
52 weeks
£m

IFRS
2005
52 weeks
£m

UK GAAP
2004
53 weeks
£m

9,022.0

8,588.1

7,797.7

7,490.5

7,728.1

1,095.9
115.4

956.7
89.2

1,211.3

1,045.9

(141.1)
58.9

1,007.1
27.0
95.0
–
–

(130.0)
20.8

936.7

965.2
1.9
–
(30.4)
–

784.5
65.6

850.1

(121.9)
17.5

745.7

751.4
(5.7)
–
–
–

528.0
70.1

598.1

(104.4)
11.4

505.1

556.1
(0.4)
–
–
(50.6)

738.6
45.0

783.6

(45.7)
(15.2)

722.7

746.1
18.7
–
–
(42.1)

(308.1)

(277.5)

(225.1)

(150.1)

(225.1)

821.0
–
0.7

821.7

659.2
0.7
–

659.9

520.6
2.5
–

523.1

355.0
231.2
–

586.2

497.6
54.7
–

552.3

IFRS
2008
£m

IFRS
2007
£m

IFRS1
2006
£m

IFRS1
2005
£m

UK GAAP
2004
£m

305.5
4,729.0
12.6
504.0
428.2
–

5,979.3
1,181.7

194.1
4,069.6
12.3
–
247.0
11.6

4,534.6
846.4

163.5
3,614.3
12.3
–
242.8
83.9

4,116.8
1,142.1

165.4
3,624.8
9.0
–
211.2
73.0

4,083.4
832.3

–
3,497.6
10.0
–
1,779.3
203.5

5,490.4
2,086.7

7,161.0

5,381.0

5,258.9

4,915.7

7,577.1

(1,988.9)

(1,606.2)

(2,017.0)

(1,237.4)

(1,919.9)

(20.5)
(3,187.6)

(283.3)
(1,843.3)

(794.9)
(1,243.3)

(676.0)
(2,044.7)

(669.5)
(2,533.7)

(5,197.0)

(3,732.8)

(4,055.2)

(3,958.1)

(5,123.1)

1,964.0

1,648.2

1,203.7

957.6

2,454.0

1 Non-current deferred tax assets have been restated by £48.4m in 2005 and 2006 due to a change in accounting policy (see note 25).

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 97

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Cash flow
Cash flows from operating activities
Generated from operating activities
Taxation paid

Cash flows from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Acquisitions and disposals
Capital expenditure and financial investment
Interest received

Cash flows from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Interest paid1
Non-equity dividend paid
Other debt financing
Equity dividends paid
Other equity financing

Cash flows from financing activities

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from activities

1 2007 includes £21.6m of exceptional finance costs.

IFRS
2008
52 weeks
£m

IFRS
2007
52 weeks
£m

IFRS
2006
52 weeks
£m

IFRS
2005
52 weeks
£m

UK GAAP
2004
53 weeks
£m

1,236.0
(166.2)

1,443.3
(150.8)

1,197.5
(101.5)

1,601.8
(166.7)

1,069.8

1,292.5

1,096.0

1,435.1

(46.4)
(924.6)
4.8

(966.2)

(88.9)
–
954.5
(343.6)
(556.2)

(34.2)

69.4

48.8
(712.8)
13.2

(650.8)

(145.0)
–
(479.2)
(260.6)
9.2

(875.6)

(233.9)

–
(266.3)
12.9

(253.4)

(142.8)
–
(420.0)
(204.1)
55.8

351.1
(113.5)
15.4

253.0

(116.5)
(2.8)
757.1
(236.9)
(2,265.1)

(711.1)

(1,864.2)

131.5

(176.1)

666.5
(220.4)

446.1

51.3
(317.4)
14.4

(251.7)

(61.2)
(3.0)
413.6
(247.1)
(66.6)

35.7

230.1

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

f

n
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
98 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Group financial record

continued

Key performance measures

Gross margin1

Net margin1

Gross profit
Revenue

Operating profit
Revenue

IFRS
2008
52 weeks

IFRS
2007
52 weeks

IFRS
2006
52 weeks

IFRS
2005
52 weeks

UK GAAP
2004
53 weeks

38.6%

38.9%

38.3%

34.7%

35.4%

13.4%

12.2%

10.9%

8.0%

9.9%

Net margin excluding property disposals and exceptional items

12.1%

12.2%

11.0%

8.7%

10.2%

Profitability1

Profit before tax
Revenue

12.5%

10.9%

9.6%

6.7%

9.4%

Profitability excluding property disposals and exceptional items

11.2%

11.2%

9.6%

7.4%

9.7%

Basic earnings per share1

Basic earnings
Weighted average ordinary shares in issue

49.2p

39.1p

31.3p

17.6p

24.2p

Earnings per share adjusted for property disposals 

and exceptional items1

Dividend per share declared in respect of the year

43.6p

22.5p

40.4p

18.3p

31.4p

14.0p

19.2p

12.1p

24.7p

11.5p

Dividend cover

Profit attributable to shareholders
Dividend payable

2.3x

2.1x

2.2x

2.9x

2.1x

Return on equity2

Profit attributable to shareholders
Average equity shareholders’ funds

45.6%

46.3%

50.0%

35.1%

25.2%

Retail gearing2

Retail debt + net post-retirement liability
Retail debt + net post-retirement liability 
+ retail shareholders’ funds

64.0%

59.1%

68.8%

76.2%

44.7%

Retail fixed charge cover

Operating profit before depreciation
and operating lease charges

5.3x

5.9x

4.9x

4.1x

7.3x

Fixed charges3

Net debt4 (£m)

Capital expenditure5 (£m)

1 Based on continuing operations.

3,094.9

1,949.5

1,729.3

2,147.7

1,994.7

1,102.9

792.4

337.7

229.4

433.5

2 Retail shareholders’ funds for 2005 and 2006 have been restated to recognise £48.4m of additional tax assets and reserves, following the change in external interpretation 

of IAS 12 – ‘Income Taxes’.

3 Fixed charges are defined as net interest payable and operating leases payable.

4 Excludes accrued interest.

5 2008 includes £48.4m of goodwill.

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC 99

Shareholder information

A
b
o
u
t

u
s

Ordinary shares
As at 29 March 2008, there are 223,128 holders of ordinary shares whose shareholdings 
are analysed below. We also have a further 38,000 investors holding shares via our
Corporate nominee.

Size of shareholding
1 – 500
501 – 1,000
1,001 – 2,000
2,001 – 5,000
5,001 – 10,000
10,001 – 100,000
100,001 – 1,000,000
1,000,001 – Highest

Total

Number of 
shareholders

110,900
45,179
34,569
23,065
5,848
2,907
472
188

223,128

Shareholders are further analysed as follows

Type of owner
Private holders
Institutional and corporate holders

Total

Percentage 
of total 
shareholders

Number of
ordinary shares

Percentage of 
ordinary shares

49.70
20.25
15.49
10.34
2.62
1.30
0.21
0.09

22,118,506
33,575,904
49,132,796
70,303,326
40,471,985
68,418,477
165,817,566
1,136,639,863

1.39
2.12
3.10
4.43
2.55
4.31
10.45
71.65

100.00

1,586,478,423

100.00

Financial calender

Record date to be eligible 
for the final dividend
30 May 2008

AGM – Royal Festival Hall,
London
9 July 2008

Final ordinary dividend for the 
year to 29 March 2008 to be paid
11 July 2008

Half year results to be announced
4 November 2008*

Record date to be eligible for the
interim dividend
14 November 2008*

212,856
10,272

223,128

95.40
4.60

334,217,456
1,252,260,967

100.00

1,586,478,423

21.07
78.93

100.00

Interim ordinary dividend to 
be paid
9 January 2009*

*provisional dates

Further information on many of the topics covered in 
these pages can be found under the ‘Investor’ section 
of our website.

Shareholder vouchers
We currently send a booklet of discount vouchers to our
shareholders each year. At present there is no minimum
holding requirement to receive these, you just need to 
be a shareholder at the qualifying date, which is normally 
the dividend record date prior to mailing. The vouchers 
for 2007/08 were distributed in January and were valid
throughout February and March 2008. 

Dividends
Shareholders are able to choose how they receive 
their dividends:

(cid:129) direct to their bank account;†
(cid:129) paid in foreign currencies;
(cid:129) reinvested in M&S shares; or
(cid:129) paid by cheque.

†M&S preferred option
The quickest and most efficient way to receive your
dividends is to have them paid direct to your bank 
account. It saves waiting for funds to clear and reduces 
the paper and postage we use. Those selecting this
payment method receive a consolidated tax voucher at
their registered address each January. However, we are
able to send a tax voucher with each payment if preferred.
To change how you receive your dividends either log on 
to shareview.co.uk or contact Equiniti.

Company website
In July 2008 we will be launching our new corporate website.
This will provide a number of interactive features and a greater
wealth of information. Shareholders can be kept up-to-date
with the latest news, as well as watch recordings of past
AGMs and our financial results presentations. Our AGM is
again being broadcast live on the internet and details of 
how to view this are included in the Notice of Meeting. The
directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity 
of the financial information on our website. This information 
has been prepared under relevant accounting standards 
and legislation. We welcome feedback on the website. Please
email comments to chairman@marks-and-spencer.com

Electronic communication
Registering for online communication gives shareholders more
control of their shareholding. The registration process is via our
registrars’ secure website shareview.com. Once registered
shareholders are able to:

(cid:129) elect how we communicate with them;
(cid:129) amend their details;
(cid:129) amend the way dividends are received; and
(cid:129) buy or sell shares online.

This doesn’t mean shareholders can no longer receive paper
copies of documents. We are able to offer a range of services
and tailor communication to meet our shareholders’ needs,
mailing hard copy documents to those who request them.
Informed choices, aligned to new technology will reduce the
amount of paper, print and postage we use. Together, we 
can minimise waste and our impact on the environment. For
further information go to the Investor section of our website.

i

i

n
d
c
a
t
o
r
s

K
e
y
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e

i

B
u
s
n
e
s
s

r
e
v
e
w

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

r
e
v
e
w

i

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

i

n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

 
 
 
 
 
100 MARKS AND SPENCER GROUP PLC

Shareholder information

continued

Electronic shareholding
Shareholders can hold shares electronically in our Corporate
nominee account. This:

(cid:129) gives increased security for personal details;
(cid:129) removes the need for a share certificate; and
(cid:129) provides share dealing at competitive rates.

For further information please contact our registrars, Equiniti.

Half year results
Our half year results will be available on our website in
November 2008.

Lost shareholders
As announced at last year’s AGM we are taking a more pro-
active approach to return unclaimed funds to shareholders
who have failed to keep their details up to date. We launched 
a search programme with Trust Research Services (TRS), 
who specialise in reuniting people with their unclaimed assets.

Working closely with TRS and our registrars, Equiniti, we 
have been able to return unclaimed dividends amounting 
to over £1m, and put these shareholders or beneficiaries 
back in touch with 2 million shares. Further information 
can be found on our website.

Shareholder security
Shareholders are advised to be wary of any unsolicited 
advice, offers to buy shares at a discount, or offers of free
reports about the Company. Details of any share dealing
facilities that the Company endorses will be included in
Company mailings or on our website. More detailed
information can be found at fsa.gov.uk/consumer

ShareGift
Shareholders with a small number of shares, the value of which
makes it uneconomical to sell, may wish to consider donating
them to the charity ShareGift (Registered charity no. 1052686).
The Company and its shareholders are active supporters 
of ShareGift donating over £200,000 to date. Find out more
about ShareGift at sharegift.org or by telephoning ShareGift
on +44 (0)20 930 3737.

American Depositary Receipts (ADRs)
The Company has a Level 1 ADR programme. This enables US
investors to purchase Marks & Spencer American Depository
Shares (ADS) in US Dollars ‘over the counter’. Each ADS
represents two ordinary shares. In February 2008 we changed
our ADR sponsor from JP Morgan Chase Bank NA to
Deutsche Bank Trust Company Americas. For further
information, please contact Deutsche Bank 
email: DB@amstock.com
website: adr.db.com

Toll-free for callers within the US: 1 866 249 2593
For those calling outside the US: +1 (718) 921 8137

How we do business
An update on Plan A, our five-year ‘eco plan’ to address key
social and environmental challenges facing M&S, is available
online at marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

Unsolicited mail
The Company is obliged by law to make its share register publicly
available should a request be received. As a consequence,
some shareholders may receive unsolicited mail. To limit the
amount of unsolicited received, please contact: 

The Mailing Preference Service (MPS) 
DMA House, 70 Margaret Street, London W1W 8SS

Alternatively, register online at mpsonline.org.uk
or call the MPS Registration line on 0845 703 4599. 

The mailing preference service is an independent organisation
which offers a free service to the public within the UK.
Registering with them will help stop most unsolicited consumer
advertising material.

Registered office and Head office
Waterside House, 35 North Wharf Road, London W2 1NW 
Registered in England and Wales (No. 4256886) 
Telephone: +44 (0)20 7935 4422

Group Secretary and Head of Corporate Governance
Graham Oakley

Registrars
Equiniti Limited,
Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, 
West Sussex BN99 6DA

Telephone: 0845 609 0810
and outside the UK: +44 (0)121 415 7071

Further information
For additional copies of the Annual report or Summary financial
statements go to marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

Alternatively, call 0800 591 697

Large print and audio files can be downloaded 
from our website.

Contact us
email us at chairman@marks-and-spencer.com
Customer queries: 0845 302 1234
Shareholder queries: 0845 609 0810
(outside the UK) +44 (0)121 415 7071

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

Index

A
Accounting policies
Acquisitions
Audit Committee
Auditors’ remuneration
Auditors’ report
Authorised share capital

B
B shares
Balance sheet
Board
Bonus
Borrowing facilities
Brand

Page
60
86
42
66
56
86

87
58, 92
32
33, 49, 53
80
10

C
Capital commitments
Capital expenditure
Cash flow statement
Chairman’s foreword
Charitable donations
Chief Executive’s statement
Clothing
Corporate governance statement
Cost of sales
Critical accounting estimates 

88
34, 65, 98
59, 93
4
38
5
11
39
65

and judgements

Customers

63
3

D
Deferred tax
62, 67, 85
Depreciation
61, 65, 77
Derivatives
62, 84
Diluted earnings per share
68
Directors’ emoluments
53, 69
Directors’ interests
52, 54
Directors’ responsibilities
37
Discontinued operation
67
98
Dividend cover
Dividend per share 4, 34, 35, 69, 94, 98

E
Earnings per share
Employees
Environment
Exceptional items
Executive team

2, 9, 34, 68, 98
20
7, 24
33, 64, 65, 66
8

F
Finance costs/income
Finance leases

Financial assets
Financial instruments
Financial liabilities
Financial record
Financial review
Fixed charge cover
Food
Footfall
Foreign exchange rates

Page
66, 94
61, 66, 77, 80, 
81, 82, 90
79
62, 82
80
96
33
98
17
3
91

G
Gearing
Geographic segments
Going concern
Goodwill
Group directors’ report

98
64
38
61, 76, 86, 87
35

H
Hedging reserve
Home

I
Income statement
Intangible assets
International Financial 
Reporting Standards

International retail
Inventories
Investment property

J
Joint venture

K
Key performance indicators
Key performance measures

L
Like-for-like sales

87
16

57, 92
76

60
5, 8, 28, 64
58, 62
78

78, 91

2, 3
98

33

M
Major shareholders
Margin (gross)
Marketplace
Market share
Minority interest
Modernisation programme
Mystery shopper
M&S Direct
M&S Money

35
2, 9, 33, 98
11
2
57, 58
24
3, 22
26
6

N
Page
34, 59, 90, 98
Net debt
Nomination Committee
42
Non-GAAP performance measures 64

O
Occupancy costs
Operating assets
Operating leases
Operating liabilities
Operating profit

65
64
61, 66, 88
64
2, 33, 57, 64, 92

P
Partnership liability
Pensions
Plan A
Prepaid leasehold premiums
Principal risks and uncertainties
Property, plant and equipment
Property valuation
Provisions

34, 81
34, 61, 70
30
79
44
77
38
85

R
Related party transactions
Remuneration Committee
Remuneration report
Reserves
Retained earnings
Return on equity
Revenue
Risk assessment

91, 95
42, 48
48
87, 98
87, 95
98
2, 33, 57, 64
44

S
Segmental information
Service
Share-based payments
Shareholders’ equity
Shareholder information
Share capital
Share issues
Share options
Simply Food
Sourcing & supply chain
Statement of recognised 
income and expense

Stores
Subsidiary undertakings

64
7, 22
73
87, 95
99
86, 95
36, 86
50, 54, 73
19, 24
22

57
5, 7, 24
95

T
Taxation
Total shareholder return
Trade and other payables
Trade and other receivables

62, 67, 85
52
79
79

marksandspencer.com/annualreport08

This report is printed on Revive uncoated, a
100% recycled paper made from post-consumer
collected waste. Revive uncoated is
manufactured to the certified environmental
management system ISO 14001.

Designed by Likemind www.likemindgroup.com

Printed by Royle Corporate Print